TOSHIBA TEC Bar Code Printer
B-SV4D-GS/GC10-QM
External Equipment Interface Specification
First Edition:
Jun. 02, 2003
Page
6.3.21 GRAPHIC COMMAND ..................................................................................................... 146
6.3.22 SAVE START COMMAND ............................................................................................... 154
6.3.23 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND ...................................................................................... 156
6.3.24 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND..................................................................................... 157
6.3.25 RESET COMMAND.......................................................................................................... 158
6.3.26 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND..................................................................................... 159
6.3.27 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND............................. 160
6.3.28 VERSI0N INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND........................................................... 162
6.3.29 MEMORY BOARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND............................................ 163
6.3.30 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND .............................................................. 165
6.3.31 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND ......................................................... 166
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR .................................................................. 167
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND ....................................................................................... 167
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND ............................................................... 170
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND............................................................................................. 172
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION................................................................................................. 173
8. ERROR PROCESSING.............................................................................................................. 174
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS ............................................................................................... 174
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING.................................................................................... 174
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES .................... 176
9. STATUS RESPONSE................................................................................................................. 177
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE............................................................................................................. 177
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................... 177
9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS.............................................................................................................. 178
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 179
10. LED INDICATIONS..................................................................................................................... 181
ii
Page
11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE..................................................................................................... 183
11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER............... 183
11.2 PRESENTATION................................................................................................................... 190
11.3 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 ......................................................................................................... 194
11.4 TrueType FONT..................................................................................................................... 201
12. BAR CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................... 208
13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA.............................................................................................. 221
14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE...................................................................... 242
iii
1. SCOPE
This specification applies to the external equipment interface for use with the Model B-SV4D general-
purpose thermal label/tag printers.
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through a serial interface (RS-
232C), parallel interface (Centronics), or a network for making various settings and printing labels.
This specification describes how to use the external equipment interface.
The model configuration is described below.
B-SV4D
Flash ROM
DRAM
1 MB
2 MB
Memory
Interface
Standard
RS-232C
Centronics
USB
Option
LAN adapter
Full cut
Cutter
Partial cut (option)
Option
Strip module
- 1 -
3. INTERFACE
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
(1) Type
: Conforming to RS-232C
(2) Mode of Communication : Full duplex
(3) Transmission Speed
: 2400 BPS
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
57600 BPS
(4) Synchronization Method : Start-stop synchronization
(5) Start Bit
(6) Stop Bit
: 1 bit
: 1 bit
2 bits
(7) Data Length
(8) Parity
: 7 bits
8 bits
: None
Even
Odd
(9) Error Detection
: Parity Error
Framing Error
Vertical parity error check
This error occurs if no stop bit is found in the frame
specified starting with the start bit.
Overrun Error
This error occurs if the next data is input before the
data input to the UART from the host is read by the
printer CPU.
(10) Protocol
: No-procedure method
(11) Data Input Code
: ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(12) Receive Buffer
: 515K bytes
- 2 -
(13) Transmission Control
Protocol
: XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR)
RTS Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and sends an
XON code (11H). (Transmission or non-transmission of the XON code is selectable by
means of the parameter setting.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer
become 1K bytes or less.
The printer sends an XON code (11H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer are 2K
bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off. (Transmission or non-
transmission of the XOFF code is selectable by means of the parameter setting.)
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY).
The printer turns the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer are 1K bytes or less.
The printer turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer are 2K bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The RTS signal is always “High”.
- 3 -
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY). The printer also sends an XON code (11H).
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 1K bytes or less, the printer turns the
DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) and sends an XOFF code (13H).
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 2K bytes or more, the printer turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY) and sends an XON code (11H).
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code or BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer
receive buffer becomes full.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off.
The RTS signal is always “High”.
RTS Protocol
When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer turns the RTS signal to “High”
(READY).
The printer turns the RTS signal to “Low” (BUSY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer are 1K bytes or less.
The printer turns the RTS signal to “High” (READY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer are 2K bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).
- 4 -
(14) RS-232 Interface pin configuration
Host Function
9 Pin
25 Pin
9 Pin
Printer Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5V
TxD
RxD
DSR
GND
RDY
N/C
RxD
TxD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
5
RDY
+5V
(15) Connector Pin Assignment and Signal Description
Signal
Pin No.
Function
Signal Direction
Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5V
TxD
RxD
DSR
GND
RDY
N/C
Provide the power of 5V
Transmit data
Printer →
← Host
← Host
Receive data
Data set ready
General Ground
Printer ready
Printer →
Not connected
RDY
+5V
Printer ready
Printer →
Provide the power of 5V
- 5 -
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
(1) Type
(2) Mode
: Centronics
: Conforms to IEEE1284 compatible mode
(3) Data Input Method : Parallel 8 bits (DATA1 ~ 8)
(4) Control Signals
: ACK, BUSY, SELECT, DATA • STB, FAULT, PE, INIT (Not used),
AUTOFD (Not used), SELECTIN (Not used)
(5) Data Input Code
: ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(6) Receive Buffer
(7) Connector
: 515K bytes
: Printer
Amp. Japan
DDK
552742-1 or equivalent
57RE-40360-73B or equivalent
Cable
Amp. Japan
DDK
552470-1 or equivalent
57E-30360 or equivalent
- 6 -
(8) Connector Pin Diagram:
Pin No.
Signal Name
Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
DATA • STB
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA 8
ACK
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31)
INIT (Not used)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BUSY
PE
SELECT
AUTOFD (Not used)
NC
FAULT
0V
0V
NC
CHASSIS GND
+5V
NC
SELECTIN (Not used)
19
1
36
18
- 7 -
4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS
4.1 SYSTEM MODE (POWER UP WITH KEY PRESSED)
There are 6 LED light indications with following sequence.
(1) Solid orange indicates the printer has entered into system mode
(2) Green and red alternate
(3) Flashing orange
(4) Green and orange alternate
(5) Orange and red alternate
(6) Solid green
4.1.1 Firmware downloading mode
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (2) and push again immediately.
2) Copy the firmware file to printer parallel port by the following command is MS-DOS prompt
mode.
C:\>COPY XXXXXX.NEW /B LPT1:
3) The LED will change to green color and blinking every one-second. When firmware update is
completed, printer will reset automatically.
4.1.2 Auto call cancellation
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (3).
2) The printer will cancel Auto Call execution. (Refer to 6.3.24)
4.1.3 Parameter clearance
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (4).
2) The printer will restore to manufacturer’s default setting and reset automatically.
4.1.4 Sensor calibration
1) Install a label/tag roll with the sensor located at proper position.
2) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (5).
3) The printer will set the sensor property for the installed media and measures label length.
4.1.5 Self-test / Dump mode
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (6).
2) The printer will print self-test then enter the dump mode.
- 8 -
[Self-test printing]
a. Printing program version & check sum
b. Printing various parameters
Parameter
Initial value
Print density fine adjustment
Print position fine adjustment
Amount for finely the cut position
Type of character code
Font of zero
0
0 mm
0 mm
PC-850
0 (without slash)
9600 bps
8 bits
Communication speed
Data length
Stop bit length
1 bit
Parity
NONE
2
Transmission control
Forward feed wait
Control code
ON
AUTO
FEED
Feed key function
Euro code
B0 H
X-coordinate adjustment
Sensor selection
0 mm
Transmissive
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS
The online mode provides the following functions for issuing labels.
(1) Issuing labels (by external equipment interface commands)
(2) Paper feed (by the [FEED] key)
(3) Error indication
(4) Sensor selection
Transmissive sensor, reflective sensor and non-sensor mode are available.
To select the sensor for the media, turn on power to let printer online mode. Open printer cover,
the LED will be turned off. Press FEED key for over 5 seconds, and then release the button, then
printer will enter sensor selection mode.
In sensor selection mode, if LED is changed to green color and press FEED key again, then
reflective sensor is selected.
If LED is changed to orange color and press FEED key again, then non-sensor is selected.
If LED is changed to red color and press FEED key again, then transmissive sensor is selected.
- 9 -
5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section describes the outline of the transmission sequence.
5.1 INITIALIZATION
Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored before the label issue
operation.
(1) Storing writable characters and logo
Power ON
No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory on the
Memory board
memory board.
Format Command
[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a
logo on the flash memory board.
Bit Map Writable
Character Command
No
Completion of storing
all characters
Yes
Storing PC interface commands
Label issue operation
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the flash memory board is used, and the Memory board Format Command is not
sent before storing already stored writable characters or logos, memory will be taken up
with every such storing.
(3) When the flash memory board is used, and another operation (storing PC interface
commands or label issue operation) is performed after storing writable characters or
logos, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) If another storing operation does not take place after storing writable characters or
logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after
about 10 seconds. In this case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer
will be cleared automatically.
- 10 -
(2) Storing PC interface commands
Power ON
No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory board.
Memory board
Format Command
[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface
commands.
Save Start Command
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
back feed length.
Position Fine
Adjust Command
Print Density Fine
Adjust Command
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.
Image Buffer Clear Command
Line Format Command
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
Bit Map Font Data Command
Save Terminate Command
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.
[ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.
[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC
interface commands.
No
Completion of
all storing
Yes
Storing writable characters or logos
Label issue operation
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the flash memory card is used, and the Memory board Format Command is not
sent before storing already stored PC interface commands, memory will be taken up with
every such storing.
(3) When the flash memory board is used, and another operation (storing writable characters
or logos, label issue operation) is performed after storing PC interface commands, the
image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion demands.
(5) If another storing operation does not take place after storing PC interface commands, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer will be cleared
automatically.
- 11 -
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION
An example of the label issue operation is described below.
(1) Where the Saved Data Call Command is not used:
Power ON
Place paper
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
back feed length.
Position Fine
Adjust Command
Print Density Fine
Adjust Command
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it
with the first printing position.
Feed Command
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.
Image Buffer Clear Command
Line Format Command
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
Issue Command
Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Format change>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Label Size Set Command and Feed Command must
always be sent. When using the same paper after the power is turned off and on, the
Label Size Set Command and Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) After the power is turned off and on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the Outline
Font Format Command, and the Bar Code Format Command should be sent as
occasion demands because they are not protected in memory.
- 12 -
(2) Where the Saved Data Call Command is used:
Power ON
[ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in the flash
Place paper
memory board.
Saved Data Call Command
Feed Command
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it with
the first printing position.
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
Issue Command
Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Feed Command must always be sent. When using the
same paper after the power is turned off and on, the Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) If the option for “automatic call at power on” for the Saved Data Call Command has
previously been selected, the Saved Data Call Command may be omitted after the
power is turned off and on.
- 13 -
6. INTERFACE COMMANDS
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS
(1) Format of Interface command
ESC
Command & Data
LF NUL
The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
There are the following three kinds of control codes:
ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL(00H)
{
(7BH), | (7CH), }
(7DH)
(2) How to use reference
Function
Format
Describes the outline of the function of the command.
Shows the format of the command.
The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
“…” indicates the repetition of an item.
Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
Other symbols must always be inserted at the designated positions before being
transmitted.
Term
Explains the term(s) used in the format.
“0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that entry must be fixed as 3 digits.
Explanation
Note
Explains the command in detail.
Supplementary explanation of the command.
Related commands
Refer to
Examples
Explains the command examples.
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00
[ESC]
T
2
0
C
3
0 [LF] [NUL]
(3) Precautions
The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification is used, the printer
operation will not be guaranteed. The commands must be used in the online mode. If any
command is transmitted in system mode, the printer will not operate. However, only the Reset
Command can be used.
- 14 -
NOTES:
1. If a command is not recognized as a command, it is ignored.
e.g.) [ESC] H, [ESC]AA, and so on.
2. If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of in put digits does not
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.
3. When a parameter is set to any character/value other than specified characters/values, a
command error occurs.
e.g.) In the case that a value should be set for parameter, “0001” is acceptable, however, “000A”
results in an error.
In the case that a character should be set for parameter, “A” is acceptable, however, “1” results in
an error.
4. If the value range of the parameter is specified, when any value beyond the range is entered, a
command error occurs. (Except for the D command)
5. When a parameter is missing, which cannot be omitted, a command error occurs.
6. The parameter should be set to either a value or a character, even if the parameter is defined as
“Ignore”.
e.g.) a : Ignore
If it is omitted, a command error occurs, except when the parameter is omissible.
If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of input digits does not
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.
7. When any value/character other than available values/characters for the parameter function is set,
a command error occurs.
e.g.) Parameter “e” for the LC command.
e: Type of line
0: Line
1: Rectangle
If “2” is set to parameter “e”, a command error occurs.
8. About D command
1) Parameter “aaaa”, “bbbb” and “cccc”
When any value lager than maximum value is entered for these three parameters, the entered
value is internally changed to the maximum value.
When any value smaller than minimum value is entered for these tree parameters, the entered
value is internally changed to the minimum value.
2) When “aaaa” is smaller than “cccc”, a command error occurs.
3) When “aaaa – cccc < 2mm”, it is internally changed to “cccc = aaaa – 2mm”.
- 15 -
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS
(1) Commands related to setting
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] D......................................17
(2) Commands related to fine adjustment
Position Fine Adjust Command
Print Density Fine Adjust Command
[ESC] AX....................................22
[ESC] AY....................................27
(3) Commands related to clear
Image Buffer Clear Command
Clear Area Command
[ESC] C......................................28
[ESC] XR ...................................29
(4) Commands related to drawing format setting
Line Format Command
[ESC] LC....................................31
[ESC] PC ...................................35
[ESC] PV....................................49
[ESC] XB....................................63
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
(5) Commands related to print data
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
[ESC] RC ...................................94
[ESC] RV ...................................97
[ESC] RB .................................100
(6) Commands related to issue and feed
Issue Command
Feed Command
Eject Command
[ESC] XS..................................113
[ESC] T ....................................123
[ESC] IB...................................128
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2.................129
Forward/Reverse Feed Command (Reserved for future)
(7) Commands related to writable characters
Storage Area Allocate Command
Memory Card Format Command
2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command
Bit Map Writable Character Command
[ESC] XF..................................131
[ESC] J1...................................133
[ESC] XE..................................134
[ESC] XD .................................135
(8) Commands related to graphics
Graphic Command
[ESC] SG .................................146
(9) Commands related to PC command saving
Memory Card Format Command
Save Start Command
Save Terminate Command
Saved Data Call Command
[ESC] J1...................................133
[ESC] XO .................................154
[ESC] XP..................................156
[ESC] XQ .................................157
(10) Commands related to control
Reset Command
Batch Reset Command
[ESC] WR ................................158
[ESC] Z0 ..................................172
(11) Commands related to status
Status Request Command
Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command
Version Information Acquire Command
[ESC] WS ................................159
[ESC] WB ................................160
[ESC] WV, [ESC] WI ...............162
(12) Commands related to printer information
Information Store Command
Information Request Command
[ESC] IG...................................165
[ESC] IR.................................. 166
(13) Commands related to parameter setting
Parameter Set Command
Fine Adjustment Value Set Command
[ESC] Z2;1 ...............................167
[ESC] Z2;2 .............................. 170
- 16 -
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND
[ESC] D
Function
Format
Term
Sets the size of a label or tag.
[ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (,dddd) [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
Pitch length of the label or tag
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: Max. 6096(609.6 mm)
5 digits: Max. 06096 (609.6 mm)
bbbb:
cccc:
Effective print width
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Effective print length
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: Max. 6096 (609.6 mm)
5 digits: Max. 06096 (609.6 mm)
dddd:
(Omissible) Function: Ignore
Explanation
[Labels]
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Label
pitch
pitch
Effective
Effective
print length
print length
X
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
0
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
- 17 -
[Tags]
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Tag
Tag
Tag
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
X
0
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
[Setting range]
Black mark
(Back side
of print)
I
Stop
I
Stop
position
position
Tag
Cut
position
E
B
Cut
position
F
Origin
Origin
A
A
H
H
Origin
Origin
G
D
C
G
C
Paper feed direction
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 18 -
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
10.0
Cutter
15.0
Thermal head dot density
Thermal head width
A: Label pitch
Tag pitch
8 dots/mm
108
Min.
25.4
Label
Max.
Min.
609.6
–
10.0
10.0
15.0
15.0
Tag
Max.
Min.
609.6
25.4
B: Label length
Max.
607.6
25.4
112
C: Backing paper width Min.
Tag width
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
D: Label width
22.4
109
E: Label-to-label gap
F: Black mark length
2.0
2.0
6.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
13
G: Effective print width Min.
Max.
108 ± 0.2
H: Effective
print length
Min.
8.0
23.4
13.0
Label
Tag
Max.
Min.
607.6
–
8.0
13.0
Max.
607.6
–
607.6
I: Slow up interval
1.0
- 19 -
Notes
(1) Before changing the label size or type of sensor, the Label Size Set Command
must first be transmitted.
(2) The Label Size Set Command is protected in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by the
Feed Command ([ESC] T) and must be aligned with the first print position prior to
printing.
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are determined according to the parameters of the Label Size Set
Command as shown in the figure on the preceding page. For the print stop
position in strip issue mode, refer to the section of the Position Fine Adjust
Command. The effective print area is centered on the label/tag.
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.
Consequently, [A : label/tag pitch] - [H: effective print length] ≥ 2 mm must be
assumed.
(6) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and according to the fine
adjustment settings in System mode.
(7) The tag rotation designation of the Issue Command ([ESC] XS) causes the origin
of drawing coordinates to be origin in the case of “printing bottom first” and to be
origin in the case of “printing top first”, as shown in the figure.
(8) The parameters must be as shown in the figure and table. Any value or paper
outside the range results in a failure of printing or an error.
(9) The setting for the backing paper width is used for the control of the backing paper
rewind motor for a strip issue. Therefore, this setting is not effective for any mode
other than strip issue mode.
- 20 -
Examples
(1) Labels
(2) Tags
Effective
print area
Black mark
(Back side
of print)
Label
76.2
mm
50.8
mm
46.8
mm
72.2
mm
Effective
print area
Tag
76.0 mm
Backing paper
82.0 mm
99.6 mm
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0762, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T10C30 [LF] [NUL]
- 21 -
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND
[ESC] AX
Function
Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
automatically set first print start position.
Adjusts the cut position so that the label will be cut at a position shifted forward or
backward from the automatically set cut position, or adjusts the strip position so that
the label will be shifted forward or backward from the automatically set strip position.
Adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after cutting, or
adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after stripping.
Format
Term
[ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to
be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb:
c:
Feed value to be finely adjusted.
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position
(or strip position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.
ddd:
e:
Amount for finely adjusting the cut position (or strip position).
000 to 350 (in 0.1 mm units)
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
ff:
Amount for finely adjusting the back feed.
00 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)
- 22 -
Explanation
[Feed Length Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the feed for shifting backward or forward)
0.0 mm
One label
First print position
+3.0 mm
One label
First print position
-3.0 mm
One label
First print position
Paper feed direction
[Cut Position Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the cut position for shifting backward or
forward)
0.0 mm
Cut position
+3.0 mm
Cut position
- 3.0 mm
Cut position
Paper feed direction
- 23 -
[Strip Position Fine Adjustment]
0.0 mm
+3.0 mm
-3.0 mm
Printing in strip issue mode is stopped at the position where the
distance from the middle point of the label-to-label gap to the
end of the strip shaft is 3 mm, since the label-to-label gap is
assumed to be 2 mm.
3 mm
2 mm
When the print stop position is not proper, the print stop position
should be adjusted using the strip position fine adjust function.
When the label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, the effective print
length should be set to the maximum (label pitch -2 mm). Then,
the print stop position should be adjusted using the strip position
fine adjust function.
2 mm
[Back Feed Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the back feed for shifting backward or forward)
0.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
+3.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
- 3.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
Paper feed direction
- 24 -
Notes
(1) If the feed value fine adjustment, cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment or
back feed value fine adjustment has been set in system mode (key operation on
the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the fine adjustment in system mode.
The max. fine adjustment values are as follows. However, the max. feed fine
adjustment value is limited within the label pitch.
Feed value fine adjustment...................................................±50.0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment......................±35.0 mm
Back feed value fine adjustment...........................................±9.9 mm
(2) After changing the fine adjustment value by this command, one label must be fed
by the Feed Command ([ESC] T) to adjust the first print position.
(3) Each fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(4) If a fine adjustment value is improper, printing will not be performed correctly.
For example, if the back feed fine adjustment value is not set properly,
the print positions without cutting and after cutting will be different from
each other. If the label is fed back excessively, the paper will not be fed
correctly during printing.
In the strip issue mode, the print position may differ between the first
label and the second label. The back feed fine adjustment is used to
adjust the length so that the label is correctly fed back to the position
placed before the forward feed is performed.
(5) The cut position (or the strip position) fine adjustment and back feed value fine
adjustment are effective only when the printer is in cut issue or strip issue mode.
- 25 -
Examples
(1) Cut issue
3.5 mm
Cut
Preprinted
2.0 mm
2.0 mm
Finely adjust the print
position by +2.0 mm.
Finely adjust the cut
position by +3.5 mm.
Finely adjust the back
feed value by +1.0 mm.
(3.0 - 2.0 = 1.0)
3.0 mm
Cut
Paper feed
direction
[ESC] AX; +020, +035, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T21C30 [LF] [NUL]
(2) Strip issue
1.0 mm
3.0 mm
Finely adjust the strip
position by +2.0 mm.
Finely adjust the print
position by +1.0 mm.
A B C
A B C
1.0 mm
[ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20D30 [LF] [NUL]
Paper feed
direction
- 26 -
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND
[ESC] AY
Function
Format
Term
Adjusts the automatically set print density.
[ESC] AY; abb, c [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density.
+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)
bb:
c:
Print density fine adjustment value
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
Indicates the mode for fine adjustment, thermal transfer or direct thermal.
1: Direct thermal
Explanation
(1) The print density fine adjustment is performed by adjusting the time that voltage is
applied to the thermal head.
(2) If the print density fine adjustment value has been set in system mode (key
operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the fine
adjustment by this command and the fine adjustment in system mode. The max.
fine adjustment values for thermal transfer/direct thermal print modes are each
±10.
(3) The fine adjustment values in thermal transfer print mode and direct thermal print
mode can be set independently.
(4) The Print Density Fine Adjust Command is protected in memory (even if the power
is turned off).
(5) The fine adjustment value for both the fine adjust command and the system mode
fine adjustment is 00 at shipment from the factory.
Notes
Even if the print density is set to the value of +08 to +10, it will be automatically
converted to +07 in order to protect the thermal head.
Examples
To set the density in thermal transfer print mode to -2.
[ESC] AY; -02, 0 [LF] [NUL]
To set the density in direct thermal print mode to +3.
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]
- 27 -
6.3.4 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND
[ESC] C
Function
Format
Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics.
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared.
(2) The increment/decrement designation (described later) is valid until the Image
Buffer Clear Command is transmitted.
(3) The link field designation (described later) is effective until the Image Buffer Clear
Command is sent.
Examples
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C51 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 28 -
6.3.5 CLEAR AREA COMMAND
[ESC] XR
Function
Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated
area in the drawing area.
Format
Term
[ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
e:
Designated area start point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area end point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area end point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of clear
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros.
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.
Explanation
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
End point
Start point
Effective
Effective
print length
print length
Start point
End point
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
Effective
X
print width
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
Notes
(1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are set to an
upper right and a lower left points, respectively.
(3) The start and end coordinates of the designated area must be set within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
- 29 -
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
8.0
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
Examples
Start point of
designated area
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
10.0 mm
58.5 mm
Designated area
End point of designated area
34.5 mm
76.2 mm
[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 30 -
6.3.6 LINE FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] LC
Function
Format
Term
Sets the line format and draws the line.
[ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
e:
Start point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
End point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
End point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical, slant)
1: Rectangle
f:
No. of line width dots
1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units)
ggg:
Radius of rounded corners of rectangles
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not
performed.)
Fixed as 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Explanation
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Start point
End
point
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Start
point
End
point
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
X
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
- 31 -
[Line]
(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| ≤ |Y2 - Y1| )
(4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )
(X1,Y1)
(X1,Y1)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X2,Y2)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Line width
- 32 -
[Rectangle]
(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000 or parameter omitted
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
Line width
(2) Radius of rounded corners ≠ 000
(X1,Y1)
Line width
Radius
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Notes
(1) In line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A/B is drawn
according to the start and end point coordinates.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC]
D).
- 33 -
(4) Programming the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of
line is 1 (rectangle). When the type of line is 0, designation of the radius is
ignored.
When the type of line is 1, and the radius of the rounded corner is 000 or omitted,
a rectangle is printed.
(5) A circle is assumed when:
| X2 - X1 |
2
| Y2 - Y1 |
2
=
≤ [Radius of rounded corners]
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
8.0
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
Examples
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
5.0 mm
28.0 mm
0.4 mm
0.4 mm
20.0 mm
30.5 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0350, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 34 -
6.3.7 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] PC
Function
Format
Sets the format indicating on the label at which the bit map font is to be printed and how
it is to be printed.
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (=rrr------rrr) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaa:
Character string number
000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d:
Character horizontal magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
d d
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications
Character vertical magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
: 0 to 9
e:
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
e e
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications
: 0 to 9
ff:
Type of font
E: Times Roman
J: Helvetica
(Bold)
14 point
(Bold)
12 point
18 point
9.5 point
7 point
M: Presentation
N: Letter Gothic
O: Prestige Elite
Q: Courier
(Bold)
(Medium)
(Medium)
(Medium)
10 point
U: Kanji (16×16 dots)/Writable character (16×16 dots) (Square Gothic)
V: Kanji (24×24 dots)/Writable character (24×24 dots) (Square Gothic)
W:Kanji (32×32 dots)/Writable character (32×32 dots) (Square Gothic)
X: Kanji (48×48 dots)/Writable character (48×48 dots) (Square Gothic)
For the JA
model only
- 35 -
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to
40 (a): Writable character 40 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to
55 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 5 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
a: Drive
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1:Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2:Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
*
The following fonts are proportional: E, J
ghh:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hh: No. of space dots between characters
00 to 99 (in dots)
ii:
j:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
90° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
Character attribution
B:
Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa):
Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character magnification (the larger one of horizontal or
vertical magnifications) × 6 dots.)
- 36 -
Jkkll:
kk:
Bold character designation
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)
No. of horizontal shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
ll:
No. of vertical shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
Mm:
Type of check digits to be attached.
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed)
m: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
oooooooooo: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Zpp:
Pq:
Zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
pp: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20
Alignment (Omissible, If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)
q: Designates the character position
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
bbb: Line feed length
010 to 500 (in 1 mm units)
cc:
Number of lines
01 to 99
rrr------rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 37 -
Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Label
Sam ple
Effective
Effective
Print origin
of coordinates
print length
print length
Print origin
of coordinates
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective print
width
Effective print
width
Y
X
0
0
X
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
[Printing direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will be within
the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
- 38 -
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
8.0
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification
Vertical
Horizontal
magnification
magnification
Horizontal
magnification
Vertical
magnification
- 39 -
[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]
Char. height ×
Vertical
magnification
Char.
height
Enlarge
Point of
origin
Char. width
Char. Width ×
Horizontal magnification
Left offset
Point of
origin of
next char.
Point of
origin
Point of
origin of
next char.
Horizontal spacing/
proportional spacing
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing)
× Horizontal magnification
(4) Type of font
Times Roman
Helvetica
Presentation
Letter Gothic
Prestige Elite
Courier
- 40 -
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified,
drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character
spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.
Point of
origin
Point of origin of
next char.
No. of fine adjust space dots
between characters
(Horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing) × Horizontal magnification
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string
Sam ple
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
(7) Selection of character attribution
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
Black characters
Reverse characters
No. of dots in the
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
Boxed characters
Stroked out characters
- 41 -
(8) Bold character designation
0°
90°
Horizontally
bold
Vertically
bold
Vertically/
horizontally
bold
Horizontally
bold
Vertically
bold
Vertically/
horizontally
bold
(9) Check digit to be attached
When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only the
check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than the numerals, drawing is
not performed.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
(10) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, the
incrementing/decrementing cannot be designated. (If it is designated, it is ignored, and
the printer operates as if there was no designation.)
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
+10
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
- 42 -
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible.
Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for
incrementing/decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the
data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
(11) Zero suppression
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed
Data
Print
0000
0000
0000
0000
00
0A12
A12
0123
0123
0123
0123
0
123 0123
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the data
row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row exceeds the
maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn. When the font type is 51, 52,
53, 54 or 55, zero suppression is not designated. If it is designated, it is ignored, and the printer
operates as if there was no designation.
(12) Alignment
No. of dots of character string
area in the X direction
Designated origin
Left
Center
Right
E q u a l s p a c e
Automatic line feed
Automatic line feed
Automatic
Line feed length
No. of lines
If characters are not placed on one line when equal space and automatic line feed is
designated, the following steps should be performed.
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed
on one line if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5.
If characters are still not placed on one line, repeatedly decrease the value of the
character-to-character space, and then reduce the horizontal magnification. When
characters are not placed on one line if the character magnification is set to 0.5 and the
character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field is
also not drawn.)
- 43 -
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. If the number of digits exceeds 255, the excessive
data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;”. After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PC04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating link field No.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
A
B
ABCD
001
ABCD
001
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
- 44 -
Notes
(1)
The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,
no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be
calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2)
Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 003 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)
0001
AB - 0100
0002
AB - 0102
9) Issue Command (1 label)
0003
AB - 0104
10) Image Buffer Clear Command
11) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)
00000
- 45 -
(3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields
with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear
Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(7) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one
format (one page).
Refer to
Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)
- 46 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
30.0
mm
S a m p l e
A B C D
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 47 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 48 -
6.3.8 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] PV
Function
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.
Fonts other than TrueType font
Format
Term
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (=ppp------ppp) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (; qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20) [LF] [NUL]
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
eeee:
f:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)
ghhh:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hhh: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
ii:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
- 49 -
j:
Character attribution
B:
Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa):
Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character size (the larger character width or height) ÷ 8 dots.)
Mk:
Type of the check digit to be attached
(Omissible. If omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)
k: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10
1: Modulus 43
(Draws data and check digit)
(Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Znn:
Zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
nn: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20
- 50 -
Po:
Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)
o: Designates the character position.
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 51 -
TrueType font
Format
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, ff, g (, hiii), jj, k (,Lmm)(=ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
eeee:
ff:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of font
01: BalloonPExtBol (File name: Ballp_eb.ttf)
02: BlacklightD (File name: Blklt_rg.ttf)
03: BrushScrD (File name: Brush_rg.ttf)
04: CG Times (File name: Tec_cgt.ttf)
05: CG Times Bold (File name: Tec_cgtb.ttf)
06: CG Times Italic (File name: Tec_cgti.ttf)
07: Clarendon Condensed Bold (File name: Tec_clcd.ttf)
08: FlashPBol (File name: Flash_bd.ttf)
09: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett (File name: Tec_gmkh.ttf)
10: GoudyHeaP (File name: Gdyhp_rg.ttf)
11: GilliesGotDBol (File name: Gilli_bd.ttf)
12: GilliesGotLig (File name: Gilli_lt.ttf)
13: NimbusSanNovTUltLigCon (File name: Nsnct_ul.ttf)
14: Ryahd (File name: ryahd.ttf)
15: Ryahd Bold (File name: ryahdbd.ttf)
16: CG Triumvirate (File name: Trium.ttf)
17: CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold (File name: Triumcb.ttf)
18: Univers Medium (File name: Tec_uni.ttf)
19: Univers Bold (File name: Tec_unib.ttf)
20: Univers Medium Italic (File name: Tec_unii.ttf)
21: add_on TrueType font 1 (File name: addttf01.ttf)
22: add_on TrueType font 2 (File name: addttf02.ttf)
23: add_on TrueType font 3 (File name: addttf0e.ttf)
24: add_on TrueType font 4 (File name: addttf04.ttf)
25: add_on TrueType font 5 (File name: addttf05.ttf)
(*1) The font types 21 to 25 are the fonts that a user adds. These fonts can
be used by specifying “addttf01.ttf” to “addttf05.ttf” for the file names and
installing these in the memory board.
(*2) For the fonts stored in flash ROM on the CPU board, parameter “ff” for
the type of font corresponds to the font type according to the setting
made when fonts are stored.
- 52 -
g:
Drive
Indicates where the TrueType font files are stored.
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
hiiii:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
h: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
iii: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
jj:
k:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
(Reserved for future)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
Character attribution
B: Black character
Lmm: True Type font size (Omissible)
Points (1/72 inch per point)
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
* TrueType fonts are not included in the standard character generator data. Therefore,
they must be installed in flash ROM on the CPU board, or the memory board.
For installation of TrueType font and details, refer to the TrueType Font Specification
(TAA-1184).
* If Arabic is selected as the character code, letters are written from right to left.
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
- 53 -
Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Label
Backing
paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Print origin of
coordinates
Sam ple
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates
Effective
Effective
X
print width
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
• The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will
be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
(3) True Type Font Size
To designate the font size and the unit is 1/72 inch per point.
- 54 -
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
8.0
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
(4) Character width and character height
Char.
height
Char.
height
Char.
width
Standard size
(256 × 256 dots)
Char. width
Char.
height
Char.
width
- 55 -
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots
between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal
spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-to-
character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified
value. When equal space is selected for the alignment, the character-to-character
space setting is invalid.
(The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing are
increased or decreased depending on the character size.)
A B C
A B
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string
Sam ple
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
(7) Selection of character attribution
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
Black characters
Reverse characters
No. of dots in the
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
Boxed characters
Stroked out characters
- 56 -
(8) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
+10
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
3rd label
4th label
5th label
(9) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. When the number of digits exceeds 255, the
excessive data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
- 57 -
(10) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PV01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PV04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating link field No.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
B
A
ABCD
001
ABC
D
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
Notes
(1) The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,
no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression
but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font, or bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
- 58 -
[Examples]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 03 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)
0001
AB-0100
0002
AB-0102
9) Issue Command (1 label)
0003
AB-0104
10) Image Buffer Clear Command
11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)
00000
(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
- 59 -
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields
with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear
Command is sent.)
(5) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment,
the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjust value so that
characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters are
on the outline font drawing position, the outline font is not painted properly. For
font types A and B, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings
do not overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For font types C,
E, F and G, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not
overlap the area for the designated character width and height.
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(8) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one
format (one page).
Refer to
Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)
- 60 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
30.0
mm
S a m p l e
A B C D
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 61 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000”; LF$; NUL$;
- 62 -
6.3.9 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] XB
Function
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the bar code is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.
In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC,
KIX CODE
(WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
5: JAN13, EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
8: EAN13 + 5 digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I:
EAN8 + 2 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: UCC/EAN128
R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S)
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE)
(Postal code for U.K)
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)
- 63 -
e:
Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
WPC
Modulus 10
Modulus 47
CODE93
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
WPC
Modulus 10
CODE93
CODE128
UCC/EAN128
Modulus 47
PSEUDO 103
Modulus 10 + Modulus 103
Customer code Special check digit
POSTNET
RM4SCC
Special check digit
Special check digit
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
* For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, and RMC4SCC, only “3:
Check digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.
ff:
k:
1-module width
01 to 15 (in dots)
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll:
Height of the bar code
0001 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RMC4SCC, KIX CODE, the height of
the long bar is specified.
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
m:
Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
ooo:
p:
Length of WPC guard bar
(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not attached.)
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
- 64 -
qq:
No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement”, “Selection of print or non-print
of numerals under bars” and “No. of zeros to be suppressed”) cannot be set when the
postal code (Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE) is selected.
- 65 -
In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, and Industrial 2 of 5
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(=sss------sss) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (standard)
4: NW7
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)
O: Industrial 2 of 5
e:
Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
CODE39
MSI
Modulus 43
IBM modulus 10
Modulus 10
ITF
Industrial 2 of 5
Modulus check character
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
CODE39
MSI
Modulus 43
IBM modulus 10
Modulus 10
ITF
Industrial 2 of 5
Modulus check character
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
MSI
ITF
IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10
DBP Modulus 10
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
MSI
IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10
ff:
Narrow bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)
gg:
Narrow space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, an element-to-element space is designated.
hh:
Wide bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)
- 66 -
ii:
jj:
k:
Wide space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed to 00.
Character-to-character space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of MSI and ITF, character-to-character space width is set to 00.
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll:
Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
mnnnnnnnnnn:
Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
m:
Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-:
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Decrement
p:
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
qq:
r:
No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
Designates the attachment of start/stop code
(Omissible. If omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)
T: Attachment of start code only
P: Attachment of stop code only
N: Start/stop code unattached
sss------sss:
Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on
the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20:
Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 67 -
In the case of Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ooo)
[LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)
(= pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
Q: Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
ECC type
00 to 14: If value “00” to “14” is designated, barcode command is ignored.
20: ECC200
ff:
1-cell width
00 to 99 (in dots)
gg:
h:
Format ID
No function (ignore)
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciiijjj:
No. of cells
(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.)
iii: No. of cells in X direction
jjj: No. of cells in Y direction
000 to 144
000 to 144
* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.
ECC200
No. of cells to be
designated
Even numbers only
Min./Max. No. of cells 10 × 10 to 144 × 144
Rectangular code
18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16
• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically
set. Also, when any data other than the above values is designated
for the number of cells in X and Y directions, the number of cells is
automatically set.
- 68 -
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk:
ll:
Code number
01 to 16
No. of divided codes
02 to 16
mmm: ID number 1
nnn: ID number 2
001 to 254
001 to 254
ooo ------ ooo:
Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2048 digits.
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 69 -
In the case of PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff:
1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg:
h:
No. of columns (strings)
01 to 30
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii:
Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2,048 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 70 -
In the case of MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d:
Type of bar code
X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
Security level
00: Fixed
ff:
1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg:
No. of columns/rows
00 to 38
h:
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii:
Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 366 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 71 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417
Parameter
(gg)
Max. number of digits
for binary mode
Max. number of digits for
upper case letter/space mode
Max. number of digits
for numeric mode
No. of columns No. of rows
00
01
02
03
04
–
1
2
3
4
–
–
–
–
–
150
22
250
38
366
55
43
72
105
237
366
97
162
250
150
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
14
17
20
24
28
3
6
8
7
12
18
22
30
38
17
26
32
44
55
1
10
13
18
22
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8
8
14
24
36
46
56
64
72
20
35
11
14
17
20
23
26
14
21
27
33
38
43
52
2
67
82
93
105
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
6
6
10
18
14
26
8
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
26
38
34
49
3
46
67
66
96
90
132
167
202
237
114
138
162
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4
8
14
22
20
32
6
13
8
20
34
49
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
27
46
67
34
58
85
4
45
76
111
155
208
261
313
366
63
106
142
178
214
250
85
106
128
150
“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates that the numbers of columns/rows are automatically set by the printer.
In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected. When the
numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns is selected.
- 72 -
In the case of QR code (Two-dimensional code)
Format
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= oo1, oo2, oo3 ------ oo20)
[LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)
e:
Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff:
g:
1-cell width
00 to 52 (in dots)
Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h:
Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Mi:
Kj:
Selection of model
(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Mask number
(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.)
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8:
Jkkllmm: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
No mask
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied
in units of bytes (Not divided)
nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.
- 73 -
In the case of MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)
Format
Term
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL]
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
Z: MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)
e:
Mode selection (Omissible)
Omitted: Mode 2
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Mode 0 (Old specification)
Mode 1 (Old specification)
Mode 2 (New specification)
Mode 3 (New specification)
Mode 4 (New specification)
Mode 2 (New specification)
Mode 6 (New specification)
Mode 2 (New specification)
Mode 2 (New specification)
Mode 2 (New specification)
Jffgg:
Zh:
Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
(If mode 0 or mode 1 is designated, it is ignored.)
ff: Code number
01 to 08
01 to 08
gg: No. of divided codes
Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block (If mode 0 or mode 1 is
designated, it is ignored.)
(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.)
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block
- 74 -
Explanation
(1) Bar code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the
bar code is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Label
Print origin of
coordinates
Effective
print
length
Effective
print
length
Print origin of
coordinates
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
X
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of bar code drawing will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Item
Method
Batch
8.0
Strip
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
- 75 -
(3) Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5
3: CODE39 (standard)
5: JAN13, EAN13
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
9: A: CODE128
C: CODE93
4: NW7
6: UPC-E
8: EAN13 +5 digits
B: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
I: EAN8 + 2 digits
K: UPC-A
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
- 76 -
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
O: Industrial 2 of 5
Q: Data Matrix
N: UCC/EAN128
P: PDF417
R: Customer bar code
S: Highest priority customer bar code
T: QR code
V: RM4SCC
U: POSTNET
W: KIX code
X: MicroPDF417
Z: MaxiCode
- 77 -
(4) Type of check digit
Where no check digit is attached, the bar code of the data row will be drawn.
In the case of the check digit check, if each check digit checked according to
the type of bar code is normal, the bar code will be drawn. If the check digit not
meeting the requirement is designated, the bar code will not be drawn.
In the case of the check digit auto attachment, each check digit is attached
according to the type of bar code and the bar code is drawn.
If the type of bar code is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or
UCC/EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the
designation of the type of check digit.
If the type of bar code is JAN, EAN, or UPC, the designation of no check digit
attachment automatically assume the check digit check.
DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
(5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to
the type of bar code. Note that the designated proper value differs according to
the rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used,
etc. Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/12 mm)
In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, PDF417, or
MicroPDF417, a 2 to 6-module width is calculated automatically when a 1-module
width is designated.
Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC
CODE93
4
3
3
3
2
8
6
6
6
4
12
9
16
12
12
12
8
-
-
-
-
9
-
-
CODE128, EAN128
PDF417
9
15
10
18
12
MicroPDF417
6
Type of bar code
Narrow
Wide
Character-to-character
Bar Space Bar Space
space
MSI
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
0
0
3
3
3
ITF
CODE39
NW7
Industrial 2 of 5
When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes the space of (narrow
space ×12) dots. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.
In the case of Data Matrix
1-cell width
When 1-cell width is 00 for the Data Matrix,
a
two-dimensional code is not drawn.
1-cell width = 3
However, the two-dimensional code printed
on the previous label is cleared.
- 78 -
In the case of QR code
1-cell width
1-cell width
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the bar
code printed on the previous label is cleared.
In the case of a postal code
1-module width
(6) Rotational angle of bar code
Point of origin
0°
90°
180°
270°
Point of origin
0°
90°
180°
270°
- 79 -
(7) Bar code height
Height
Height
[PDF417, MicroPDF417]
Height
Height
[Postal code]
Height
When the bar code height is 0000, bar code (including guard bars) and numerals
under bars are not drawn. However, the bar code printed on the previous label is
cleared.
(8) Length of guard bar
The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC.
It is ignored in any other cases.
Height of bar code
Length of guard bar
- 80 -
(9) Numerals under bars
Numerals are not or provided under bars according the parameter for the
presence or absence of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under
bars to be printed vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of
numerals under bars is OCR-B. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only
horizontally according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in the
fixed one magnification.
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]
In the case of JAN and EAN
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits
(Example) EAN8
In the case of UPC
(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits
(Example) UPC-E
- 81 -
In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC
(Example) CODE39
(Example) UCC/EAN128
(10) Start/Stop Code
This parameter is valid only when the type of bar code is CODE39 and NW7.
Where the parameter is designated, the program will not check if the transmit print data
is with a start code and stop code.
When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will
be attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case of
NW7.
For details, refer to “Auto Attachment of Start/Stop Code” to be discussed later in this
specification.
(11) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code (code
A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2.
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
+10
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
- 82 -
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII), NW-7, CODE93, CODE128, if a data
string other than numerals is included in the data, increment/decrement designation is
performed. If any code which does not exist in each bar code table is contained in the
data, increment/decrement designation is not performed.
Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are possible. Only the
numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are
returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128
Increment/decrement calculation starts from the last digit in the data strings. When
the data string to be calculated is numeric, and the next (upper) digit is “>”, that is a
special code (shown with underline below). The next digit is calculated without
incrementing/decrementing these two digits.
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
00>08
+1
0A>08
+1
0A9>08
+1
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00>08
00>09
01>00
01>01
01>02
0A>08
0A>09
1A>00
1A>01
1A>02
0A9>08
0A9>09
1A0>00
1A0>01
1A0>02
(12) Zero suppression
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed
Data
Print
0000
0000
0000
0
0000
00
0A12
A12
0123
123
0123
0123
0123
0123
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop code is sent to sending print data, the start/stop
code is also counted as a digit. When the bar code type is JAN, EAN, UPC, or UCC/EAN
128, the data will be drawn without zero suppression.
- 83 -
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar
codes. For codes, refer to the bar code table mentioned later.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data string are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PC04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating link field No.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
A
B
ABCD
001
ABCD
001
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
- 84 -
(15) Explanation for Data Matrix
ECC type
Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correction code (ECC) and restore normal data. Since there are several ECCs. ECC
should be designated according to usage. The general correction ability is as follows.
However, it may vary according to the error conditions.
ECC type
ECC200
Overhead by ECC
Approx. 30%
Format ID No function (Ignore)
Maximum number of digits
The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type. Since each Kanji
character uses 2 bytes, the maximum number of digits for it becomes half of the
following values.
Numeric
2000
Alphanumeric
2000
8 bit
ECC200
1556
For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.
Connection setting
The connection setting is used to comprise data with a set of two-dimensional codes
when the data cannot be expressed with a two-dimensional code. When three two-
dimensional codes are used to comprise data, identification information of 1/3, 2/3,
and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID number is programmed to
include a proper combination of two-dimensional codes when one label contains plural
connecting symbols. For example, when there are two kinds of data containing
identification information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label, combination of two-
dimensional codes is unclear. By adding the ID number, the combination is made
clear.
- 85 -
Cell size and the effective data capacity
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
Row Col
capacity
Capacit
y
10 10
6
3
1
12 12 10
14 14 16
16 16 24
18 18 36
20 20 44
22 22 60
24 24 72
26 26 88
32 32 124
6
3
10
16
25
31
43
52
64
91
6
10
16
20
28
34
42
60
84
36 36 172 127
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556
Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
capacity
Row
8
Col
18 10
32 20
6
3
8
13
22
31
46
72
8
12 26 32
12 36 44
16 36 64
16 48 98
14
20
30
47
- 86 -
(16) Explanation for the PDF417 and MicroPDF417
Security level
The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be
designated according to usage to perform the error correction function.
For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level
Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
0
2
6
14
30
62
126
254
510
Low
High
No. of columns (strings)
The number of rows is variable in the PDF417. The row length (No. of data strings) is
also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be easily printed,
by changing the proportion of the height and width.
The number of columns (data strings) is variable between 1 and 30.
If the number of columns is small when data amount is large and security level is high,
drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of rows exceeds 90 when
the number of columns becomes small. (When the PDF417 is used, the number of
rows of symbols is limited from 3 to 90.)
For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the
number of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated, see
the table on page 72. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg)
varies according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for the
set parameter (gg) is set, the bar code is not printed. The number of columns (data
strings) is variable from 1 to 4.
However, the max. number of lines, which is 44, depends on the number of columns.
(17) Explanation for QR code
Error correction level
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.
Overhead by correcting
Level
Error correction ability
Low
an error
High density level
Standard level
7%
15%
25%
30%
Reliability level
High reliability level
High
- 87 -
1-cell width
1-cell width
1-cell width
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the two-
dimensional code printed on the previous label is cleared.
Selection of mode
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.
Selection of model
Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.
Mask number
To be sure to read the QR code, it is preferable that white and black modules are
arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern
“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from
appearing in the symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking
pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set
to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate
mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.
Connection setting
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a
narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The
data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all
input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift
JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below:
“0123456789
” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89
”.
Code No. 1
Code No. 2
Code No. 3
No. of divided codes: 3
No. of divided codes: 3
No. of divided codes: 3
Parity data: 84
Parity data: 84
Parity data: 84
Data “0123”
Data “4567”
Data “89
”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789
”.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 84
(18) Explanation for MaxiCode
Connection setting
For MaxiCode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes.
- 88 -
Notes
(1) The check digit attach and increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing
will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If
the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field to
be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1))
Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2))
Image Buffer Clear Command
Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”)
Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”)
Issue Command (2 labels)
(0001)
(0100)
(0002)
(0102)
Issue Command (1 label)
(0003)
(0104)
Image Buffer Clear Command
Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”)
Issue Command (1 label)
(3000)
- 89 -
(3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC]
XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next
drawing data is printed. Therefore, the bar code number which differs according to the
drawing fields should be designated. Since the automatic field clear is not performed
between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may
be drawn using the same bar code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the
same bar code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same bar
code No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(7) The same barcode number cannot be programmed more than once in one format (one
page).
Refer to
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)
- 90 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
15.0
mm
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
15.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 91 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 92 -
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
55.5
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 93 -
6.3.10 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RC
Function
Format
Provides data for the bit map font row.
[ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RC; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaa:
Character string number
000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
(Max. 127 digits when the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55.)
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given
later in this specification.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is
51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, only up to 127 digits can be linked.
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due
to the omission.
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)
Refer to
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
- 94 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
Sam ple
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 95 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 96 -
6.3.11 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RV
Function
Format
Provides data for the outline font row.
[ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RV; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given
later in this specification.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. Data exceeding the max. number
of digits will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)
Refer to
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
- 97 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
Sam ple
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 98 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 99 -
6.3.12 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RB
Function
Format
Provides data for the bar code.
[ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RB; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar code.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
The Data Command for the MaxiCode is described later.
(1) Data check
Explanation
If there is data in the data row, which does not meet the type of bar code, the bar
code will not be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of
CODE128 (without auto code selection), the bar code will not be drawn.
If there is data different from the one designated using the format ID when Data
Matrix is used, the symbol is not drawn.
(2) No. of digits of data
When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will
be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code, see below.
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code:
MicroPDF417:
2000 digits
366 digits
93 digits
MaxiCode:
Customer bar code:
Highest priority customer bar code:
POSTNET:
20 digits
19 digits
5, 9, 11 digits
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits
KIX CODE:
18 digits
Bar codes other than the above
126 digits
When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code type, the bar code
is not drawn.
For the MaxiCode, the maximum number of digits varies according to the mode. In
mode 2 or 3 and mode 4 or 6, the maximum number of digits is 84 and 93,
respectively.
- 100 -
The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for
ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number
of digits is half those of the values described below since a Kanji character
occupies 2 bytes.
Max number of digits for Data Matrix
Numeric
2000
Alphanumeric
2000
8 bit
ECC200
1556
- 101 -
Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
Row Col
capacity
capacity
10 10
6
3
1
12 12 10
14 14 16
16 16 24
18 18 36
20 20 44
22 22 60
24 24 72
26 26 88
32 32 124
6
3
10
16
25
31
43
52
64
91
6
10
16
20
28
34
42
60
84
36 36 172 127
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556
Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
capacity
Row
8
Col
18 10
32 20
6
3
8
13
22
31
46
72
8
12 26 32
12 36 44
16 36 64
16 48 98
14
20
30
47
- 102 -
When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters called
code words is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies
according to the contents of data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits
according to modes is as follows.
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the
maximum values become smaller than the following values, since the internal
mode switching code is used.
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value
becomes smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of lines
exceeds 90, the symbols are not drawn.
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified.
The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.
In the case of PDF417
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode:
1108 digits
2000 digits
• Numeric compaction mode:
In the case of MicroPDF417
• Binary mode:
150 digits
250 digits
366 digits
• Upper case letter/space mode:
• Numeric compaction mode:
For the MicroPDF417, the printer
sets the security level automatically.
No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
Level 0
code words
0
2
6
14
30
62
126
254
510
Low
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
High
- 103 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417
Parameter
(gg)
Max. number of digits
for binary mode
Max. number of digits for
upper case letter/space mode
Max. number of digits
for numeric mode
No. of columns No. of rows
00
01
02
03
04
–
1
2
3
4
–
–
–
–
–
150
22
250
38
366
55
43
72
105
237
366
97
162
250
150
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
14
17
20
24
28
3
6
8
7
12
18
22
30
38
17
26
32
44
55
1
10
13
18
22
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8
8
14
24
36
46
56
64
72
20
35
11
14
17
20
23
26
14
21
27
33
38
43
52
2
67
82
93
105
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
6
6
10
18
14
26
8
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
26
38
34
49
3
46
67
66
96
90
132
167
202
237
114
138
162
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
4
8
14
22
20
32
6
13
8
20
34
49
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
27
46
67
34
58
85
4
45
76
111
155
208
261
313
366
63
106
142
178
214
250
85
106
128
150
- 104 -
(3) CODE128 code selection
If the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in
the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)
Determining the start character
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
to be used is (CODE C).
(b) In any case other than (a) in , if a control character appears before a
small letter (see .) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
is (CODE A).
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).
If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a),
:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric
data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the
number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric
data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should
conform to (b) and (c) in
.
If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character just before the first numeric data.
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character immediately after the first numeric data.
If a control character appears in (CODE B):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next
control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first control character.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control
character.
If a small letter appears in (CODE A):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next
small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first small letter.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small
letter.
If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other
than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform
to (b) and (c) in
.
- 105 -
(4) CODE128 code selection check
Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been
set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn.
[Conditions causing an error]
No start code is designated.
A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).
A control character is found in (CODE B).
Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found
in (CODE C).
There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.
The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.
(SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).
(5) Kanji code selection
• In the case of Data Matrix and PDF417, Kanji codes can be printed. Shift JIS,
JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8 codes can be mixed.
(6) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 2000 digits of data strings of Data Matrix and PDF417 can be linked. For
other bar codes, up to 126 digits can be linked. (The value varies according to
the type of bar code.)
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV”, or “RB” command
code is designated.)
- 106 -
(7) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode
Mode selection
Data to be printed
Binary mode
Mode selection
No. of data strings
(4 digits)
Data to be printed
“,” (comma)
Mixed mode
Data
“,” (comma)
Data
Data
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is
designated when the mode is selected.
Mode
Code
Details
N
A
Numerals
0 to 9
Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B
K
Binary (8-bit)
Kanji
00H to FFH
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.
(8) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.
Data to be printed
(9) How to transmit the control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
=
=
=
> @ (3EH, 40H)
> A (3EH, 41H)
> B (3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
=
=
=
> ] (3EH, 5DH)
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)
> _ (3EH, 5FH)
* How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) > 0 (3EH, 30H)
=
- 107 -
(10) Transfer code for QR code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
q
r
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
•
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.
(11) Examples of data designation
Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
A A B C 1 2 3
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
Mixed mode
Numeric mode
Kanji mode
:
:
:
123456
Kanji data
Binary mode
a
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a
i
u
e
o
, A A B C
Data to be
printed
Data to be
printed
No. of
data strings
Data to be printed
Data to be
printed
Designation of mode
Automatic mode
When the data above ( ) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C
Data to be printed
i
u
e
o
- 108 -
(12) MaxiCode data
For mode 0 or 1:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 2 or 3:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 4 or 6:
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]
bbbbbbbbb:
• Mode 0 or 2:
b1b2b3b4b5:
b6b7b8b9:
Postal code
Fixed as 9 digits
Zip code
Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics)
Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics)
• Mode 1 or 3:
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code
Fixed as 6 digits (Character “A” of
code set)
b7b8b9:
ccc:
ddd:
Vacant
Class of service
Country code
Fixed as 3 digits (20H)
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
84 digits
eee --- eee: Message data strings
fffffffff:
Primary message data strings
9 digits
ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings
84 digits
NOTES: 1. When anything other than numerics is included in the data string of zip
code (mode 2), zip code extension, class of service or country code, a
MaxiCode is not drawn.
2. If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected,
the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining
digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When message data exceeding
84 digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before drawing a
MaxiCode.
3. If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when mode
4 or 6 is selected, the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data,
and the remaining digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When
message data exceeding 93 digits is received, the excess data will be
discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
4. Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for
scanner programming.
- 109 -
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
15.0 mm
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
63.0 mm
15.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; ABC [LF] [NUL]
*
*
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 110 -
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 111 -
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
55.5
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 04, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 112 -
6.3.13 ISSUE COMMAND
[ESC] XS
Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.
[ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]
Function
Format
Term
aaaa:
bbb:
Number of labels to be issued
0001 to 9999
Cut interval. Designates the number of pieces to be printed before the backing
paper is cut.
000 to 100 (no cut when 000)
c:
Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
4: Reflective sensor
d:
e:
Issue mode
C: Batch mode
D: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is valid.)
E: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is ignored,
the applicator supports this mode.)
Issue speed
1: 2 inches/sec
2: 2 inches/sec
3: 3 inches/sec
4: 4 inches/sec
5: 5 inches/sec
6: 5 inches/sec
7: 5 inches/sec
8: 5 inches/sec
9: 5 inches/sec
A: 5 inches/sec
f:
With/without ribbon
Ignore
g:
Designates tag rotation.
0: Printing bottom first
1: Printing top first
2: Mirror printing bottom first
3: Mirror printing top first
h:
Type of status response
0: No status response
1: Status response
- 113 -
Explanation
(1) Number of labels to be issued
If increment/decrement is not specified, the designated number of pieces with
the same drawing data will be issued.
If increment /decrement is specified, the designated number of pieces will be
issued while incrementing/decrementing the piece of the designated drawing
area.
* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
(2) Cut interval
The cut interval is valid only when the cutter has been installed and the issue mode
is “C”. If an error occurs during an issue after the cut interval is designated, and
then printing is restarted, the printer ejects the printed paper then resumes printing
on the paper where the error occurred.
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after cut-issuing
the last label, when the cut interval is valid and “with automatic forward feed
standby” set in the system mode, the printer automatically performs a 10-mm
forward feed.
When the Issue Command is received during the automatic forward feed standby,
an issue is started after a reverse feed to the original position.
If any command is sent and processed after the Issue Command is sent, the
automatic forward feed is not performed. Therefore, a command should not be
sent after the Issue Command is sent. If the power should not be turned off then
on, or the printer should not be placed in a pause/reset state before the automatic
forward feed, since the automatic forward feed is not performed when the paper is
fed by turning the power off then on, or by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer in
the pause/reset state.
If the paper is fed by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer during the forward feed
standby, the printer feeds one label, cuts, performs the automatic forward feed
then stops.
(3) Type of sensor
No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the
Label Size Set Command.
Reflective sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is
finely adjusted for every piece.
Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every piece.
- 114 -
(4) Issue mode
[C: Batch mode (cut interval 0)]
Head position
(1) Idling
(during automatic forward feed standby)
(2) Prints 1st label (A)
A
(3) Prints 2nd label (B)
(4) Prints 3rd label (C)
A
B
B
C
A
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)
(3) Feeds to the cut position
A
A
(4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
A
(5) Feeds back to the head position and start to
print the 2nd label (B) .
B
B
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)
(7) Feeds to the cut position
B
(8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
B
(9) Feeds back to the home position
- 115 -
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)
(3) Feeds to the cut position
A
A
(4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
A
(5) Feeds back to the head position and start to
print the 2nd label (B) .
B
B
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)
(7) Feeds to the cut position
B
(8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
B
(9) Feeds back to the home position
(10) 10-mm automatic forward feed
after 3 seconds (Reserved for future)
- 116 -
[D: Strip mode (Issue count: 3)]
Strip position Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Feeds back to the home position
(3) End of printing 1st label (A)
(4) Removes 1st label (A)
A
B
C
(5) Feeds back to the home position
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)
(7) Removes 2nd label (B)
(8) Feeds back to the home position
(9) End of printing 3rd label (C)
* The next label is not printed until the printed
label is removed.
- 117 -
(5) Issue speed
• Printing takes place at the designated speed.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.
Model
B-SV4D
Parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
2”/sec
3”/sec
4”/sec
5”/sec
- 118 -
(6) Tag rotation
The origin of coordinates and printing direction vary according to the designation of
tag rotation.
Printing bottom first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
S a m p l
S a m p l
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
Y
[Labels]
[Tags]
Printing top first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Label
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
X
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 119 -
Mirror printing bottom first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Origin of
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
pitch
Tag
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
pitch
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
Y
[Labels]
[Tags]
Mirror printing top first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Label
pitch
Tag
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
pitch
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
0
X
X
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 120 -
(7) Status response
When the option with status response has been selected, a status response is
made at the end of printing or if an error occurs.
In batch mode and cut mode, the print end status response is made after printing
on the designated number of labels.
In strip mode, the status response is made after printing one label.
* Do not change the parameter for status response/no status response during
printing. Otherwise the status response may not be performed properly.
Examples
• Issue count:
• Cut interval:
• Paper:
4 pieces
1 piece
Tag paper (Reflective
sensor used)
Cut issue
41.0
mm
S a m p l e
76.2
mm
• Issue mode:
• Issue speed:
• Ribbon:
73.2
mm
8”/sec.
With
• Status response: On
15.0 mm
82.0 mm
Paper feed direction
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C8201 [LF] [NUL]
- 121 -
Notes
(1) Explanation of processes involved to stop the label at the home position after the
head-open state is detected:
When the gap between labels (black mark) is found after the head open state is
detected, the value to stop at the home position of each label between the head
and the sensor is set again.
Stop position
Sensor
A
B
C
77 mm
92 mm
• The paper is moved in the above state.
Stop position
Sensor
A
B
C
• Stop position after feeding one label
Stop position
Sensor
+15 mm after detection
of gap between B and C
A
B
C
D
* However, an error will result when feed jam conditions are met.
Paper feed direction
(2) Any cut or strip issue commands should not be sent to the printer on which the
cutter or strip module is not installed.
- 122 -
6.3.14 FEED COMMAND
[ESC] T
Function
Format
Term
Feeds the paper.
[ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]
a:
Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
4: Reflective sensor
b:
c:
Selects cut or non-cut
0: Non-cut
1: Cut
Feed mode
C: Batch mode (Cut and feed when “Cut” is selected for parameter b.)
D: Strip mode
E: Strip mode
(with back feed)
(Reserved for future)
d:
Feedspeed
1: 2 inches/sec
2: 2 inches/sec
3: 3 inches/sec
4: 4 inches/sec
5: 5 inches/sec
6: 5 inches/sec
7: 5 inches/sec
8: 5 inches/sec
9: 5 inches/sec
A: 5 inches/sec
e: With/without ribbon
Ignore
Explanation
(1) Type of sensor
No sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command.
Reflective sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position is
finely adjusted.
Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.
- 123 -
Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels):
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted according to the
value set by the threshold set operation (key operation).
Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)
Feeding takes place according to the parameters designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is
finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the threshold set
operation (key operation).
(2) Cut/non-cut
This option is valid in batch feed mode only. (Non-cut is selected in strip mode.)
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after cut-feeding
when “with automatic forward feed standby” is set in the system mode, the printer
automatically performs a 10-mm forward feed.
When the Feed Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the
printer performs a reverse feed to the original position.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
For cutting the label having label pitch of 38 mm or less, refer to the section
regarding the Position Fine Adjustment Command.
(3) Feed mode
[C: Batch (Non-cut)]
Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) End of feed
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)
[C: Batch (Cut)]
“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
- 124 -
[C: Batch (Cut)]
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
(6) 10-mm automatic forward feed after 3 seconds
(Reserved for future)
[D: Strip]
Strip position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Feeding starts
(4) End of feed
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)
* If a label is not removed, a feed is performed.
- 125 -
(4) Feed speed
• A feed is performed at the designated speed.
However, the back feed speed in the cut mode or the strip mode is 3”/sec.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply.
For details, refer to the Supply Specification.
Model
B-SV4D
Parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
2”/sec
3”/sec
4”/sec
5”/sec
Notes
(1) If a change of label size or type of sensor, feed fine adjustment, cut position fine
adjustment (or strip position fine adjustment) or back feed fine adjustment is
made, one label must be fed to adjust the first print position prior to printing.
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) When “status response made” is selected in the Issue Command parameter
setting, a status response is made after the end of feed or when an error occurs.
(4) For explanation about the process to stop the label at the home position, refer to
the section regarding the Issue Command.
(5) If no subsequent command is received from the PC after the last label has been
fed, the printer automatically performs a 14.7-mm forward feed is selected and
“with automatic forward feed standby” is selected in the system mode. When the
Feed Command is received during the forward feed standby, the printer feeds the
label in reverse to the original position.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
- 126 -
Examples
41.0
mm
76.2 mm
S a m p l e
73.2
mm
15.0 mm
82.0 mm
Paper feed direction
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]
- 127 -
6.3.15 EJECT COMMAND
[ESC] IB
Function
Ejects (cuts) the label presently remaining between the head and the cutter and returns
to the original position.
Format
Notes
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after ejection, the
printer automatically performs a 10-mm forward feed when “with automatic forward feed
standby” is selected in the system mode.
When the Eject Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the printer
feeds the label in reverse to the original position and ejects it.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
Examples
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
A
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)
(3) End of printing 2nd label (B)
(4) End of printing 3rd label (C)
A
B
B
A
B
C
A
B
C
(5) Feeds to the cut position by the
Eject Command
A
C
(6) End of cutting
(7) Since non-stop cut is performed,
paper is fed over the cut position.
(8) Feeds back to home position.
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]
- 128 -
6.3.16 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2
Function
Format
After printing or feeding the paper, feeds the paper to a manually cut position.
When issuing the next label, feeds the paper back to the first printing position.
Forward Feed
[ESC] U1; aaaa [LF] [NUL]
Reverse Feed
[ESC] U2; aaaa [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaaa:
Feed value by which the paper is fed forward or backward.
0030 to 2000 (in 0.1 mm units)
Notes
(1) When the [FEED] key is pressed on the printer, one label is fed, and then fed by the
forward feed value automatically if the Forward Feed Command has already been
transmitted.
(2) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is ignored in strip mode and cut issue
mode.
(4) The forward feed is performed at the speed designated in the Issue Command or
Feed Command.
.
- 129 -
Examples
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Feeds one label
(3) Feeds to the position at which a
label can be cut manually.
(4) Cut manually.
(5) Standby
(6) Feeds back to the home position
(7) Prints three A labels
A
A
A
A
A
A
(8) Feeds to the position at which
labels can be cut manually.
A
A
A
(9) Cut manually.
(10) Standby
(11) Feeds back to home position
(12) Prints one B label
B
B
(13) Feeds to the position at which
a label can be cut manually.
B
(14) Cut manually.
(15) Standby
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0003, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
- 130 -
6.3.17 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND
[ESC] XF
Function
Format
Term
Allocates the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board.
[ESC] XF; aa, bb [, cc] [, Ed] [LF] [NUL]
aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
bb: Size for bit map writable character storage area
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size for BASIC file storage area
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
Ed: Indicates where the upper files are stored.
d:
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
Explanation
(1) The storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board has a total capacity of 192 KB.
If the memory board is available, the stored area increases as followings.
1MB: 00 to 16 (0 KB to 1024 KB)
2MB: 00 to 32 (0 KB to 2024 KB)
3MB: 00 to 48 (0 KB to 3072 KB)
4MB: 00 to 64 (0 KB to 4096 KB)
6MB: 00 to 96 (0 KB to 6144 KB)
8MB: 00 to 99 (0 KB to 8192 KB)
(2) If this command is received, the complete area in flash ROM on the CPU / memory
board is cleared.
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU / memory
board cannot be used.
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order – the TrueType font storage
area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area.
After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining area is used for the PC save
area.
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, is 192 KB, the
TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the
BASIC file storage area are allocated as specified. However, the PC save area is
not allocated.
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 192
KB, the TrueType font storage area is allocated first, as specified. Then, the
remaining area is allocated to the bit map writable character storage area. If there
is remaining area after the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable
character storage area are allocated, it is used for the BASIC file storage area. The
PC save area is not allocated.
- 131 -
(7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for the TrueType font storage area, the bit map
writable character storage area, or the BASIC file storage area, the storage area is
not allocated.
(8) When “192” (192 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, all storage
areas are used. Therefore, other storage areas cannot be allocated. For example,
if “192” is specified for the TrueType Font storage area, all storage areas are used
for the TrueType Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area,
the BASIC file storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Memory Card Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)
The TrueType font storage area and bit map writable character storage area are set to
64 KB and 64 KB, respectively.
(PC save area: 192 KB - 64KB - 64 KB = 64 KB)
[ESC] XF; 01, 01 [LF] [NUL]
- 132 -
6.3.18 MEMORY BOARD FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] J1
Function
Format
Formats (initializes) the flash memory board for storage.
[ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]
Term
a: Formatting (initializing) range for flash memory
A: All area
B: PC save area
C: Bitmap writable character storage area
D: True Type area
E: Basic file area (Reserved for future)
b: Drive (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
Explanation
(1) 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 MB flash memory board can be formatted.
(2) The flash memory board can be roughly divided into the PC save area and the
writable character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either
separately or at the same time.
(3) When using a new flash memory board, the area to be used must be formatted
(initialized) before the PC interface command is saved or writable characters are
stored.
(4) After formatting the flash memory board, the remaining memory is the PC save area
and writable character storage area.
(5) When the flash memory board is used and the already stored data (PC interface
commands, writable characters, logos) is stored again, memory is consumed with
every storing unless the Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted.
(6) When performing the label issue operation after sending the Memory Board Format
Command, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(7) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)
after about 10 seconds. In this case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
[ESC] J1; A, 1 [LF] [NUL]
- 133 -
6.3.19 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND
[ESC] XE
Function
Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in flash ROM on
the CPU board or the flash memory board.
Format
Term
[ESC] XE;(Sj, cc,)a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 ---, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]
Sj, cc,: Drive and Writable character set (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU
board and writable character set “51” are selected.)
0, 51:
Flash ROM on the CPU board
Writable character code 51
1,51 to 55:
Flash ROM on the memory board
Writable character code 51 to 55
aaaa:
bbbb:
First character code for each range
2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
No. of characters for each range
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
Explanation
(1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be
divided into two or more. The control information area for the unnecessary code
can be deleted by designating the character code range, and the capacity of flash
memory is not wasted.
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0x4000 (16384
characters).
(3) Up to 2700 can be designated for the range.
(4) A character code which is not appropriate for the setting for this command cannot
be stored.
Refer to
Example
• Memory Card Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
In the case that Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH:
Character data is present.
Character data is not present.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
8140
:
81F0
:
8240
:
82F0
:
8340
:
83D0
[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]
- 134 -
6.3.20 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND
[ESC] XD
Function
Format
Writes writable characters and logos in the flash memory board, or flash ROM on the
CPU board.
For the flash memory board or flash ROM on the CPU board
[ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]
Term
Sj: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
aa:
Writable character set
• Flash memory board or Flash ROM on the CPU board
01 to 40
51 to 55 (2-byte code character)
b(b): Writable character code
• Flash memory board or Flash ROM on the CPU board
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 44)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character set is 51 to 55)
ccc:
ddd:
eee:
fff:
Left offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
Top offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
Character width
001 to 720 (in dots)
Character height
001 to 720 (in dots)
- 135 -
ggg:
h:
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
000 to 999 (in dots)
Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored
*
If each parameter for left offset, top offset, character width, character height, and
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is fixed as “000”, the setting is ignored when
the writable character set is 41 to 44,
Explanation
(1) Type of writable character
Up to 40 and 49 writable character sets can be stored for the memory board,
respectively. However, the maximum number of characters varies depending on
the writable character size and number of characters because of the limited
memory capacity. For writable character sets 41 to 44, each writable character
size is fixed.
(2) Character code
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of
characters is 40 sets × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending on
the writable character size and number of characters because of the limited
memory capacity. For character sets 41 to 44, a character code consisting of 1
byte is stored. However, when the character code is called up, F0H is added to
the upper digit of it, and consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters can
be stored per character set.
(3) 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 MB memory board can be used for storing a writable character.
(4) The configuration of the writable character file stored in the memory board is as
follows.
1st byte
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
11th byte
No. of dots for left offset
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for top offset
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for character height
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for character width
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
(from upper to lower)
Writable character data (Hex. data)
(If it is stored in the nibble mode, data is 8 bits/byte.)
- 136 -
1-byte writable character
0100
W/C = Writable character
01000020. UDF (W/C file for character code 20H)
01000021. UDF (W/C file for character code 21H)
01000022. UDF (W/C file for character code 22H)
Memory board
(Writable character 41)
0101
(Writable character 42)
0102 Each W/C file
(Writable character 43)
Each W/C file
010000FD. UDF (W/C file for character code FDH)
010000FE. UDF (W/C file for character code FEH)
010000FF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFH)
0126
(Writable character 39)
0127 Each W/C file
Each W/C file
(Writable character 40)
Writable character with Kanji size
001A
001A0040. UDF (W/C file for character code 40H)
001A0041. UDF (W/C file for character code 41H)
(Writable character 41)
001B
(Writable character 42)
001C Each W/C file
(Writable character 43)
001D Each W/C file
Each W/C file
001A007E. UDF (W/C file for character code 7EH)
001A0080. UDF (W/C file for character code 80H)
001A0081. UDF (W/C file for character code 81H)
(Writable character 44)
001A00FC. UDF (W/C file for character code FCH)
2-byte writable character
0200
02002020. UDF (W/C file for character code 2020H)
02002021. UDF (W/C file for character code 2021H)
02002022. UDF (W/C file for character code 2022H)
(Writable character 51)
0201
(Writable character 52)
0202 Each W/C file
(Writable character 53)
0203 Each W/C file
(Writable character 54)
0204 Each W/C file
(Writable character 55)
Each W/C file
0200FFFD. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFDH)
0200FFFE. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFEH)
0200FFFF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFFH)
• How to assign the directory name for a writable character set
Directory name for writable character 01
Directory name for writable character 02
→
→
“0100”
“0101”
Directory name for writable character 39
Directory name for writable character 40
Directory name for writable character 41
→
→
→
“0126”
“0127”
“001A”
Directory name for writable character 44
Directory name for writable character 51
→
→
“001D”
“0200”
Directory name for writable character 55
• How to assign the file name
→
“0204”
0100 0022. UDF (Writable character 40: writable character file for character code 22H)
Identifier indicating the writable character file
Character code (2-byte code: Code 22H)
Writable character set (Writable character 40: Same as the directory name)
- 137 -
(6)
Top
offset
22 dots
Char.
height
31 dots
Base line
Reference
point
Reference point
of next char.
Left
offset
Char. width
26 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots
(7) Writable character set: 01 to 40, 51 to 55
Char. width 26 dots
Nibble mode
1
9
30H
2
30H
3
30H
4
3FH
5
3CH
6
30H
7
30H
8
30H
3FH 10 3CH 11 37H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Char.
height
31 dots
240
30H
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H
Hex. mode
1
5
00H
2
6
0FH
7FH
3
C0H
4
00H
FCH
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
120
00H
241 FFH 242 FCH 243 00H 244 00H
- 138 -
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 248). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 124).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
Notes
(1) With the same writable character set designated, character width and character height can be
designated for each writable character code. In other words, character size can be changed
for each character, thus saving memory.
(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the parameters of
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top offset.
(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinates are at the above left when drawing because
the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)
- 139 -
(8) Writable character set: 41 (16×16 dots )
Nibble mode
Character width 16 dots
1
5
30H
30H
2
6
30H
31H
3
30H
38H
4
30H
7
•
Character
height
16 dots
•
•
58 31H 59 38H 60 30H
61 30H 62 30H 63 30H 64 30H
Hex. mode
4
4
4
4
1
5
00H
01H
2
6
00H
80H
3
01H
01H
4
80H
8
8
7
•
•
•
26 80H 27 01H 28 80H
29 01H 30 80H 31 00H 32 00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 64). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 64 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 32).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 32 bytes.
* When writable character 41 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 16
dots.
- 140 -
(9) Writable character set: 42 (24×24 dots )
Character width 24 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
30H
30H
2
8
30H
30H
3
9
30H
33H
4
30H
5
30H
6
30H
•
•
•
•
•
Character
height
24 dots
137
30H
138
30H
139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H
Hex. mode
1
4
00H
00H
2
5
00H
3
6
00H
00H
4
4
4
4
4
4
3CH
•
•
•
•
8
8
8
67 00H 68 3CH 69 00H
70 00H 71 00H 72 00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 144). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 144 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 72).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 72 bytes.
* When writable character 42 is designated, the width and height of the character are both
24 dots.
- 141 -
(10) Writable character set: 43 (32×32 dots)
Character width 32 dots
Nibble mode
1
8
30H
30H
2
9
30H
3
30H
4
30H
5
30H
6
30H
7
30H
30H 10 30H 11 30H 12 37H
•
•
•
•
•
Character
height
32 dots
248
30H
249
30H
250 30H 251 30H 252 30H 253 30H 254 30H 255 30H 256 30H
Hex. mode
1
5
00H
00H
2
6
00H
07H
3
C0H
C0H
4
00H
7
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
•
123
C0H
124
00H
8
8
8
8
125 00H 126 00H 127 00H 128 00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 256). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 256 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 128).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 128 bytes.
* When writable character 43 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 32
dots.
- 142 -
(11) Writable character set: 44 (48×48 dots)
Character width 48 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
30H
30H
2
8
30H
30H
3
9
30H
4
30H
5
30H
6
30H
30H 10 30H
•
•
•
•
•
569
30H
570
30H
571 30H 572 30H 573 30H 574 30H 575 30H 576 30H
Character
height
48 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
00H
00H
2
8
00H
00H
3
9
00H
4
00H
5
00H
6
00H
07H 10 E0H
•
•
•
•
•
281
00H
282
00H
283 00H 284 00H 285 00H 286 00H 287 00H 288 00H
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 576). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 576 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 288).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 288 bytes.
* When writable character 44 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 48
dots.
- 143 -
Notes
(1) No matter what character set or character code is selected, no memory will be
wasted.
(2) When a new writable character is stored, the Flash Memory board Format
Command ([ESC] J1) must be transmitted.
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in the flash memory board again if
the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) is transmitted, but memory will be
consumed with every storage. Memory can be efficiently used by sending the
Format Command ([ESC] J1) before storing.
(4) If a flash memory card is used, and a label issue operation is performed after
sending the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD), the image buffer is
cleared automatically.
(5) When the storing operation stops after storing the writable character and logos, the
printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10
seconds. In this case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer will
be cleared automatically.
Refer to
Flash Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)
- 144 -
Examples
Writable character set:
03
Writable character code 70H
Top
offset
22 dots
Char.
height
31 dots
Base line
Reference
point of next
char.
Reference
point
Left offset
2 dots
Char. width 26 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots
[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>0
001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = ”0”
31H = ”1”
32H = ”2”
33H = ”3”
34H = ”4”
35H = ”5”
36H = ”6”
37H = ”7”
38H = ”8”
39H = ”9”
3AH = ”:”
3BH = ”;”
3CH = ”<”
3DH = ”=”
3EH = ”>”
3FH = ”?”
- 145 -
6.3.21 GRAPHIC COMMAND
[ESC] SG
Function
Format
Draws graphic data.
[ESC] SG; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
or
[ESC] SG0; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ffff, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
Print origin of X-coordinate for drawing graphic data
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate for drawing graphic data
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
No. of graphic width dots
Fixed as 4 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this
designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in
the graphic data.)
dddd:
No. of graphic height dots
4 or 5 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this
designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in
the graphic data.)
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:
Resolution of graphic data:
*only two types
0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.)
0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.)
e:
Type of graphic data
[ESC] SG; -- command:
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)
Overwrite drawing
2: BMP file mode (monochrome bmp) Overwrite drawing
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)
OR drawing
6: PCX file mode (monochrome pcx) Overwrite drawing
[ESC] SG0; -- command:
A: Printer driver compression mode
Overwrite drawing
ffff:
Data count (Effective only for [ESC] SG0; -- command)
Fixed as 4 digits
Represents the total number of bytes for the compressed graphic data by 32
bits in Hex.
Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295 bytes
(00H, 00H, 00H, 00H to FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH)
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data
- 146 -
Explanation
(1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “6”, or “A” is selected, the graphic data is
drawn by overwriting the image buffer.
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying
out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates
Graphic
height dots
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Graphic
height dots
Print origin of
coordinates
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Graphic width
dots
Graphic width
dots
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
Y
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
X
0
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
- 147 -
Print origin of
coordinates
Graphic width 19 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
30H
30H
2
8
30H
30H
3
33H
4
30H
5
30H
6
30H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graphic
height
22 dots
126
30H
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H
Hex. mode
1
4
00H
00H
2
5
30H
3
00H
38H
•
•
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
63 00H
64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 132). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 66).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
- 148 -
[When TOPIX compression mode is selected]
Range for length
First line
Second line
Graphic data
Length L1
L1
L2
L3
(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )
0 0 1 4
Ex. Length = 20 bytes:
(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L1
0: Not present
1: Present
512 dots 512 dots 512 dots
(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained
(of the L1 large block).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L2
0: Not present
1: Present
64 dots
64 dots
64 dots
(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of
the L2 medium block).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L3
0: Not present
1: Present
8 dots
8 dots
8 dots
Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1). The
alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).
*
The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer
size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the graphic
width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte).
- 149 -
[When the printer driver compression mode is selected]
(1) For the [ESC] SG0; -- command, only “A: Printer driver compression mode” can be selected
for the type of graphic data. The parameter for the data count is attached after the parameter
for the type of graphic data. When the total number of data cannot be provided by the printer
driver, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H” should be specified for the number of graphic data. However,
in this case, the printer diver cannot support printing through a serial interface (RS-232C).
(2) How to compress data
Compression is performed for every data of one line specified for the number of graphic
width dots.
The data is made up in units of 8 dots. A repeated value is encoded in 2 bytes. The first
byte is a numeric value n indicating that a value is repeated (-n + 1) times.
The range is between -127 and -1. The second byte is the repeated value.
If a value is not repeated the first byte is the numeric value m. The length of the values is
indicated in (m+1). The range of “m” is between 0 and 126. The length of the repetition of
the value and ”m” should not exceed 127 and 126, respectively.
If it exceeds the range, it should be divided into blocks of repetition.
When the same contents as the data for 1 line appear repeatedly in the next line and after,
the number of lines in which the same contents appear is encoded in 2 bytes. The first byte
is fixed as 127. The second byte indicates “N” times that the same contents are repeated.
Its range is between 1 and 255. “N” should not exceed 255. If it exceeds the range, the data
for the excess number of times should be compressed as the new data of 1 line, and the
remaining number of repetitions should be encoded.
[Example]
Data before being compressed (Width: 120 dots, Height: 300 lines)
Line No.
Graphic data
1
2
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
299
300
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
Data after being compressed
Line No.
Graphic data
1
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh
2 to 256
257
7FH FFH
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FDh FFh
7FH 2BH
258 to 300
FDh = -3
-(-3) + 1 = 4
FFh is repeated 4 times.
03h = 3
3 + 1 = 4
4-byte data (BBh CCh DDh EEh) without
repetition
FAh = -6
-(-6) + 1 = 7
AAh is repeated 7 times.
- 150 -
Notes
(1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the graphic
data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command
([ESC] D).
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must also
be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective print
area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as the
above.
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm.
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.33 mm in the X direction with
respect to the designated print origin of the X-coordinate.
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly
developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with
respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4
bits occurs.
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SV4D
Strip
Item
Method
Batch
8.0
Cutter
13.0
Effective print width
Min.
13.0
Max.
108 ± 0.2
Effective
print length
Min.
23.4
Label
Max.
Min.
607.6
8.0
Tag
–
–
13.0
Max.
607.6
607.6
- 151 -
Examples
10.0 mm
Origin
(0, 0)
24.0 mm
Graphic width 19 dots
Graphic
height
22 dots
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??
>000??>0007? <0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = “0”
31H = “1”
32H = “2”
33H = “3”
34H = “4”
35H = “5”
36H = “6”
37H = “7”
38H = “8”
39H = “9”
3AH = “:”
3BH = “;”
3CH = “<”
3DH = “=”
3EH = “>”
3FH = “?”
- 152 -
[TOPIX compression mode]
10.0 mm
Origin
(0, 0)
24.0 mm
Graphic width 19 dots
Graphic
height
22 dots
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30
Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09
(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line)
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20
(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line)
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line) (13th line)
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)
- 153 -
6.3.22 SAVE START COMMAND
[ESC] XO
Function
Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.
(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in the flash
ROM on the memory board, or flash ROM on the CPU board.)
Format
Term
[ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]
aa: Identification number to be used for saving in the flash memory board or calling
01 to 99
dddddddd: Ignore
Sb: Drive in which the PC interface command is stored
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
c: Status response at save time
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Explanation
Notes
(1) When the PC interface command is stored in the memory board, directory
“PCSAVE” is created, and then the directory “Specified file name. PCS” is created
under the “PCSAVE” directory level.
(1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the
following will be saved into the flash memory board.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)
• Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)
(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time.
Refer to
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)
- 154 -
Examples
[ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]
- 155 -
6.3.23 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND
[ESC] XP
Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]
Function
Format
Note
If the storing operation is not continued after storing the PC interface command, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
Refer to
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
- 156 -
6.3.24 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND
[ESC] XQ
Function
Format
Calls PC interface commands saved in the flash ROM on the memory board, or flash
ROM on the CPU board.
[ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa: Identification number of the file to be called from the flash memory board
01 to 99
dddddddd: Ignore
Sb: Drive from which the command is called
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)
c:
d:
Status response when the data is called up
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Auto call at power on time
L: Auto call (Always call 01 file with Auto call. Refer to Page 8 for cancel.)
M: No auto call
Notes
(1) If the relevant save identifier is not found, an error will result.
(2) However, if no save number subject to auto call is found with the option for auto
call at power on time selected, the option for no auto call will be selected causing
no error.
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command in auto call at power on
time by the Saved Data Call Command, a command error will result. After an error
has occurred, the power must be turned off. The option for no auto call is selected
when the power is turned on again.
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data Call
Command is sent after the Save Terminate command.
Refer to
•
•
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
Examples
[ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 157 -
6.3.25 RESET COMMAND
[ESC] WR
Function
Format
Returns the printer to its initial state.
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
The printer is returned to the same state as when the power was turned on. When the
printer receives this command during printing, it returns to its initial state after issuing the
label which is being printed. The next command must not be sent while the printer is
performing initial processing after this command is transmitted.
Notes
(1) The Reset Command is effective in serial interface (RS-232C), parallel port or
USB port.
(2) When the printer receives a command in system mode, only the Reset Command
can be processed and any other command cannot be processed.
(3) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, the error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in system mode.
(4) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed until the
printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
Example
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]
- 158 -
6.3.26 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND
[ESC] WS
Function
Format
Sends the printer status to the host computer.
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of “status
response/no status response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer status,
and indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining count
of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be
printed is transmitted.
Notes
(1) This command is available only for the RS-232C and USB interfaces.
(2) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.
Example
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
- 159 -
6.3.27 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND
[ESC] WB
Function
Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host computer.
Format
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of the
receive buffer regardless of the setting of “status response/no status response.” The
status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status only.
The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently being printed.
No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. Free space of the
receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is returned to the host.
Status Format (23 bytes)
SOH
STX
01H
Indicates the top of the status block.
Detailed status
02H
3XH
3XH
Status
Status type
33H Indicates the status requested by the WB command.
3XH
Remaining
issue count
3XH
Remaining number of labels to be issued.
3XH
3XH
3XH Total number of bytes of the status block.
Length
“30H30H”(0) ~ “39H39H”(99)
Note: In case of this status format(23 bytes), This is “32H33H”.
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
0DH
0AH
Free space of receive buffer
“30H30H30H30H30H”(0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)
Note: The maximum value must be the receive buffer capacity.
Free space of
receive buffer
Receive buffer capacity
“30H30H30H30H30H” (0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)
Note: The maximum value differs depending on the models.
Receive buffer
capacity
CR
LF
Indicates the end of the status block.
- 160 -
Notes
(1) This command is available only for the RS-232C and USB interfaces.
(2) The printer returns the status only for the interface which sent this command to the
host.
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.
Example
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
- 161 -
6.3.28 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND
[ESC] WV
Function
Format
Sends information such as the program version of the printer.
[ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) The format of the program version data (total 27 bytes of data) to be returned to the
host is as follows.
SOH
STX
01H
02H
30H
34H
41H
50H
52H
32H
30H
30H
33H
42H
2DH
34H
38H
30H
44H
20H
56H
31H
2EH
30H
41H
03H
04H
0DH
0AH
“0”
“4”
“A”
“P”
“R”
“2”
“0”
“0”
“3”
“B”
“-“
Creation date of program:
9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
Month-Year
Creation date
“S”
“V”
“4”
“D”
SP
“V”
“1”
“.”
Model:
Model
7 bytes of ASCII code indicating model
Program version:
5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
Revision
Version
“0”
“A”
Version
ETX
EOT
CR
LF
(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of
the command previously sent is completed, the next command is not processed.
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the
program version data may not be returned immediately.
Notes
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.
- 162 -
6.3.29 MEMORY BOARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WI
Function
Format
Term
Sends information regarding the use of the memory board to the host.
[ESC] WI; a, b [LF] [NUL]
a: Drive
1: Slot 1
2: Slot 1
memory board (Option)
memory board (Option)
b: Information to be acquired
A: Free space
B: Bitmap
C: Stored PC command save file
D: TrueType
E: Basic file (Reserved for future)
Explanation
(1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:
A: Free space
SOH STX “A” Slot
Free space (Kbyte)
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 41H xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Free space (in units of Kbytes):
000000 (KB) to 999999 (KB)
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
When the memory board is not inserted into a specified slot, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H,
00H, 00H” is returned for the free spaces.
B: Writable character list
Storage information for writable character
SOH STX “B” Slot
ETX EOT CR
LF
(55 bytes)
01H 02H 42H xxH “0”/“1” “0”/“1” ········ “0”/“1” “0”/“1” 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Writable character No. 55
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 54
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 02
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 01
Stored/Not stored
Slot
“0” (30H): Not stored
“1” (31H): Slot 1
“1” (31H): Stored
If only one writable character is stored, information of the writable character No. is set to
“1” (Stored). The storage information of a specified character code can be acquired by
using the memory board Stored Writable Character Information Acquire Command
([ESC] WG).
The storage information for the writable character has a total of 55 bytes. The writable
character No. is assigned from 01 to 44, and from 51 to 55. Therefore, bytes to which
Nos. 45 to 50 are assigned are sure to be set to “0” (30H). When the memory board is
not inserted in the specified slot, “00H” for the storage information for the writable
character is returned.
- 163 -
C: Stored PC command save file
Stored PC command save file name
SOH STX “C” Slot
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
File name (including expansion):
“00H” should be placed between file
names.
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored PC command save
file name.
There is no file.
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.
D: Stored True Type Font file
Stored PC command save file name
SOH STX “D” Slot
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
File name (including expansion):
“00H” should be placed between file
names.
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored True Type Font file
name.
There is no file.
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.
(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of
the command previously sent is completed, this command is not processed.
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the
program version data may not be returned immediately.
Note
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.
- 164 -
6.3.30 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND
[ESC] IG
Function
Format
Term
Sets the printer information.
[ESC] IG; aaa --- aaabbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]
aaa --- aaa:
bbb --- bbb:
Model name (Fixed as 20 digits)
20H to 7FH of ASCII codes
Serial No. (Fixed as 11digits)
20H to 7FH of ASCII codes
Explanation
(1) The model name and serial No. of the printer can be optionally stored. The
character codes which can be set in each item are 20H to 7FH. If any code
other than these is used, it is replaced with the space code.
(2) The printer information has already been set when shipped.
(3) The stored printer information is backed up in memory and is kept even if the
power is turned off.
(4) This stored information should be printed on test print.
The following information is stored in the printer.
Examples
Model name:
Serial No.:
B-SV4D-GS10-QM
2303A000001
[ESC] IG; [42H] [2DH] [53H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [30H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [20H]
[20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H]
[31H] [LF] [NUL]
Refer to
Printer Information Request Command ([ESC] IR)
- 165 -
6.3.31 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND
[ESC] IR
Function
Format
Retrieves the printer information.
[ESC] IR [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) The model name, serial No., and software version of the printer set by the
Printer Information Store Command ([ESC] IG) is retrieved
[Information field]
Model name
20 bytes
Serial No.
11 bytes
Examples
The following information is stored in the printer.
Model name:
Serial No.:
B-SV4D-GS10-QM
2303A000001
Model name:
[42H] [2DH] [53H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [30H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [20H]
[20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H]
Serial No.:
Refer to
[32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [31H]
Printer Information Store Command ([ESC] IG)
- 166 -
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND
[ESC] Z2; 1
Function
Format
Term
Sets each parameter on the printer.
[ESC] Z2; 1, abcdefghijklmnopqqrst [LF] [NUL]
a:
Character code selection
0: PC-850
1: PC-852
2: PC-857
3: PC-8
4: PC-851
5: PC-855
6: PC-1250
7: PC-1251
8: PC-1252
9: PC-1253
A: PC-1254
B: PC-1257
C: LATIN9
D: Arabic
b:
c:
Font “0” selection
0: 0 (without slash)
1: 0 (with slash)
RS-232C communication speed
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
5: 57600 bps
d:
e:
f:
RS-232C data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
RS-232C parity check
0: NONE
1: EVEN
2: ODD
- 167 -
g:
RS-232C transmission control
0: XON/XOFF protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
1: READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
2: XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
3: XON/XOFF protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
4: RTS protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
h:
Language for LCD messages
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
2: Ignore
3: Ignore
4: Ignore
5: Ignore
6: Ignore
i:
Forward feed standby after an issue
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
j:
Head up operation after a label is cut
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
k:
l:
Ribbon saving system
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
Type of control code
0: Automatic selection
1: ESC, LF, NUL mode
2: {, |, } mode
m:
n:
Ribbon type selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
Strip status selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
- 168 -
o:
p:
[FEED] key function
0: FEED: Feeds one label.
1: PRINT: Prints data from the image buffer on one label.
Kanji code selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
qq: Euro code setting
“20” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code)
*1
r:
Automatic head broken dots check
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
s:
t:
Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
Web printer function setting
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
Explanation
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command become effective
when the power is turned on or the printer is reset.
*1: To specify the hex code to be set in 2 bytes of ASCII code as shown below:
Example 1: To set 36H: ”36” (33H, 36H)
Example 2: To set 42H: ”42” (34H, 32H)
Example 3: To set FFH: ”FF” (46H, 46H)
- 169 -
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND
[ESC] Z2; 2
Function
Format
Term
Sets various fine adjustment values on the printer.
[ESC] Z2; 2, abbbcdddeffghhhijjkllmnnoppqqrr [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a feed length fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
bbb: Feed length fine adjustment value
Ignore
c:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position (or strip
position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ddd: Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position)
Ignore
e:
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ff:
g:
Back feed length fine adjustment value
Ignore
Indicates the direction, positive or negative, in which the X-coordinate fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Positive direction
-: Negative direction
hhh: X-coordinate fine adjustment value
*1
000 to 995 (in units of 0.5 mm)
i:
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the thermal transfer print
mode.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
jj:
k:
Print density fine adjustment value (for the thermal transfer print mode)
Ignore
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the direct thermal print
mode.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ll:
Print density fine adjustment value (for the direct thermal print mode)
Ignore
m:
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
-: Ignore
nn: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
Ignore
- 170 -
o:
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
pp: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
Ignore
qq: Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
Ignore
rr:
Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
Ignore
ss:
Sensor sensitivity adjustment value
00 to 63
Explanation
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command become effective when
the power is turned on or the printer is reset.
(3) Sensor sensitivity adjustment value
This value is used to adjust the sensor sensitivity. Available values are from 00 to 63
is the lowest sensitivity, while 63 is the highest sensitivity.
Normally, the sensor sensitivity can be set automatically when calibrating the
sensor. This value can be seen from the self-test printing.
For example)
SENSOR TRANSMISSIVE [17]
This means current sensor type is transmissive sensor and sensitivity level is 17. If
the automatic sensor calibration cannot register label gap or black mark, use this
parameter to adjust sensitivity manually.
*1: The value can be set in units of 0.1 mm. However, the value which is actually set
on the printer is in units of 0.5 mm. When a value from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it
is actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm
is set, it is actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm.
- 171 -
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND
[ESC] Z0 (zero)
Function
Format
Resets the printer.
[ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
• This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
• Some values in the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) and the Fine Adjustment
Value Set Command ([ESC Z2;2]), will become effective when the printer is initialized.
This command should be sent after the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) or Fine
Adjustment Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2) is sent.
- 172 -
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION
(1) Automatic Selection
This printer automatically selects [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H) or {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH)
as an interface command control code. After the power is turned on, the program checks the data
from the host for [ESC] and { and assumes the data whichever has been sent first to be a control
code.
For example, if [ESC] is sent first after the power is turned on, [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL] becomes a control
code, and if { is sent first, { . | . } becomes a control code. Control code selection is made for every
command. If the first command is [ESC] ~ [LF] [NUL], followed by [ESC], the control code becomes
[ESC]. [LF]. [NUL], and if it is followed by { , the control code for the next command becomes { . | . }.
When { . | . } is a control code, the data of 00H to 1FH in { ~ | } is ignored. However, the data of
00H to 1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or Writable Character
Command in hexadecimal mode. When { . | . } is a control code, { . | . } cannot be used in the data
of the Data Command or Display Command.
Power ON
Read received data
No
<Received data ESC?>
No
Yes
<Received data { ?>
Yes
Assume control code
to be ESC. LF. NUL
Assume control code
to be { . | . }
Discard read
data
Command processing
(2) Manual Selection (ESC. LF. NUL)
The control code of the command is [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H), and the control code
selection is not performed.
(3) Manual Selection ({ . | . })
The control code of the command is {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH), and the control code selection is not
performed. Data of 00H to 1FH is ignored and discarded in this mode. However, data of 00H to
1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or Writable Character Command in
hexadecimal mode. { . | . } cannot be used in the data of the Data Command or Display Command.
- 173 -
8. ERROR PROCESSING
If the printer detects any of the following errors, it will display the error message (LED), makes status
response (serial interface, parallel interface and USB interface), and stops its operation.
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS
(1) Command Errors
An error results if a command length error, command transmission sequence error, command
format error or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the command. An error results if
the Format Command of a field is not transmitted and its Data Command is transmitted. When
attempting to call a PC Save Command of a save identifier which is not saved, an error results.
An undefined command is not detected as an error, and data is discarded until [NUL] or [}] is
received.
(2) Hardware Errors
An error results if a framing error, overrun error or parity error is found during data reception when
using the serial interface (RS-232C).
* At the moment when a command error or hardware error occurs, the printer shows the error
message and makes status response before stopping. The Status Request Command and
Reset Command only can be processed and other commands are not processed. When the
printer is restored by the [RESTART] key, the printer enters the initial state which is obtained
after the power is turned on.
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING
(1) Feed Jam
When the relation between the programmed label (or tag) pitch (A) and the label (or tag) pitch
detected by the sensor (B) is not indicated by the following formula, an error will result: (A) ×
50% ≤ (B) ≤ (A) × 150%
• A paper jam has occurred during paper feed.
• The paper is not placed properly.
• The actual label does not match the type of the sensor.
• The sensor position is not aligned with the black mark.
• The actual label size does not meet the designated label length.
• No label-to-label gap is detected due to preprint.
• The sensor is not thoroughly adjusted.
(The sensor is not adjusted for the label to be used.)
If the stripped label does not cover the strip sensor when printing or feeding is completed in
strip mode, an error will result.
- 174 -
(2) Cutter Error
• Cutter
When the cutter does not move from the cutter home position 50 msec or more after the cutter
solenoid is driven, an error will result.
The cutter moves from the home position, however, it does not return to the home position after
500 msec.
(3) Label End
When the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state in 10 mm
continuously, an error will result.
If the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state when an issue, feed
and ejection is attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
(4) Head Open Error
If the head open sensor detects the open state when an issue, feed and ejection is attempted in
a printer stop state, an error will result.
(5) Thermal Head Excessive Temperature
When the thermal head temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high
temperature, an error will result.
- 175 -
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES
(1) Write Error
• An error has occurred in writing in the flash memory board.
(2) Format Error
• An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash memory board.
(3) Memory Full
• Storing is impossible because of the insufficient flash memory capacity.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer shows the error message, makes status
response, then stops. The Status Request Command and Reset Command only can be
processed and other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [FEED] key is
impossible.
- 176 -
9. STATUS RESPONSE
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS
There are the following two kinds of status response functions.
(1) Status transmission function at the end of normal transmission and occurrence of an error
(auto status transmission)
If the option for “status response” has been selected, the printer sends status to the host
computer when the printer performs a feed or completes an issue normally (For batch/cut
mode: after the designated number of labels are printed, For strip mode: after one label is
printed). In the online mode, the head up/down status is sent to the host computer.
When each error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.
The remaining count in the status response indicates the remaining count of the batch
currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.
(2) Status transmission function by status request (Status Request Command)
Upon request to send status by the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest
status indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the option for “status
response/no status response” . The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the
batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is
transmitted. This command is not stored in the receive buffer and executed immediately
when it is received.
• Strip status
The strip status (05H) returned by the Status Request Command depends on the system
mode setting.
When the strip status of the system mode is set to “1”:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer
returns (00H).
When the strip status of the system mode is set to “2”:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer
returns (05H).
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the strip
status (05H) is returned for both settings.
9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT
SOH STX
Status
Remaining count
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Remaining count
• 0000 ~ 9999
(Fixed as 0000 in save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (Status Request Command)
• “2” (32H) (Auto status transmission)
Detail status
- 177 -
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS
Detail Status
Auto Status
Status Request
Command
Printer Status
Transmission
The head was closed in the online mode.
The head was opened in the online mode.
Operating (Analyzing command, drawing,
printing, feeding)
00
01
–
00
01
02
In pause
–
–
04
05
06
Waiting for stripping
A command error was found in analyzing the
command.
06
A parity error, overrun error or framing error
occurred during communication by RS-232C
A paper jam occurred during paper feed.
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.
The label has run out.
07
07
11
12
13
15
11
12
13
15
An attempt was made to feed or issue with the
head open.
(except the [FEED] key)
The thermal head temperature has become
excessively high.
18
18
A label issue is completed normally.
The feed has been terminated normally.
In writable character or
40
41
–
–
–
02
PC command save mode
50
51
54
50
51
54
An error has occurred in writing data
into the flash memory board.
An erase error has occurred in
formatting the flash memory board.
Saving failed because of the
insufficient capacity of the flash
memory board.
The flash memory board is being initialized.
An EEPROM for back up cannot be
read/written properly.
–
02
02
02
- 178 -
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
Printer Status
Output Signal
BUSY PAUSE FAULT
PE
L
In the online mode
L
H
H
L
H
H
L
In the online mode (communicating)
The head was opened in the online mode.
In a pause state
L, H
–
L
L
–
–
L
L
L
Data was set from the host with the receive
buffer full.
H
H
L
–
After data was sent from the host with the
receive buffer full, some data is processed and
room becomes available.
H
H
L
–
–
Initialize process in execution (After the power
is turned on or INIT is received)
A command error has occurred in analyzing
the command.
L
L
L
L
L
L
–
–
–
–
A paper jam occurred during paper feed.
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.
The label has run out.
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
A feed or an issue was attempted with the
head opened. (except the [FEED] key)
The thermal head temperature has become
excessively high.
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
In writable character or PC command save
mode
An error has occurred in writing data into the
flash memory board.
An erase error has occurred in formatting the
flash memory board.
Saving failed because of the insufficient
capacity of the flash memory board.
The flash memory card is being initialized.
(Initialization is carried out for approximately
15 seconds)
–
–
A momentary power interruption has occurred.
An EEPROM for back-up cannot be
read/written properly.
L
L
L
L
L
L
- 179 -
Printer Status
Output Signal
BUSY PAUSE FAULT
PE
(a) A command has been fetched from an
odd address.
–
L
L
L
(b) Word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the word
data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from
a place other than the boundary of the
long word data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other
than the delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
- 180 -
10. LED INDICATIONS
Restoration Acceptance
by
of Status
Request
LED Indication
No.
Printer Status
[FEED] key
Reset
Command
Yes/No
Yes/No
Green
Red
Orange
U
U
1
2
In the online mode
-
-
Yes
Yes
O
U
In the online mode
(Communicating)
U
U
The head was opened in the
online mode.
-
Yes
U
U
O
3
4
In a pause state
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A parity error, overrun error
or framing error has occurred
during communication by RS-
232C.
U
U
O
O
5
6
A paper jam occurred during
paper feed.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
An abnormal condition
occurred at the cutter.
The label has run out.
A feed or an issue was
attempted with the head
opened.
U
U
7
8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(except the [FEED] key)
The thermal head
U
9
No
Yes
temperature has become
excessively high.
O
U
U
10
11
In writable character or PC
command save mode
An error has occurred in
writing data into the flash
memory board.
-
Yes
Yes
No
U
U
U
12
13
14
An erase error has occurred
in formatting the flash
memory board.
No
No
–
Yes
Yes
–
Saving failed because of the
insufficient capacity of the
flash memory card.
U
The flash memory board is
being initialized.
(Initialization is carried out for
approximately 15 seconds)
An EEPROM for back-up
cannot be read/written
properly.
U
15
No
No
- 181 -
Restoration Acceptance
by
of Status
Request
LED Indication
No.
16
Printer Status
[FEED]
Reset
key
Yes/No
Command
Yes/No
Green
Red
Orange
U
(a) A command has been
fetched from an odd
address.
No
No
(b) Word data has been
accessed from a place
other than the boundary
of the word data.
(c) Long word data has
been accessed from a
place other than the
boundary of the long
word data.
(d) An undefined command
in a place other than the
delay slot has been
decoded.
(e) An undefined command
in the delay slot has
been decoded.
(f) A command which
rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been
decoded.
NOTE 1:
:On
Oꢀ: Blinking
Uꢀ: Off
- 182 -
11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE
The followings are the character code tables. However, the characters which can be printed are
different according to the character type. For the character which can be printed, refer to the print
sample described later.
11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER
(Bit map font type: E, J, N, O, Q)
(1) PC-850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
1
Í
Ó
ß
-
!
”
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Ô
Ò
õ
=
¾
¶
§
÷
¸
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Ã
Î
þ
(
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
¨
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
¹
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
¦
Ì
Ý
¯
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
»
/
_
ƒ
¤
´
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
α
β
Γ
π
Σ
σ
µ
τ
≡
±
≥
≤
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
÷
≈
°
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
Ω
)
Ö
Ü
•
•
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
∞
∅
ε
√
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt
∫
«
/
»
∩
- 183 -
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
Ó
ß
!
”
Ð
Ë
ó
ú
Ô
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
Á
Â
§
÷
¸
Í
Î
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
¨
)
ë
Ö
Ü
Ú
*
J
j
¬
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ý
^
~
Ä
×
«
»
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
º
Ó
ß
-
!
"
ª
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
Ê
Ë
È
Ô
Ò
õ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¾
¶
§
÷
¸
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
Í
Î
Ï
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
Ã
(
¿
®
¬
×
Ú
Û
Ù
ì
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
¨
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
¼
¡
¹
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be
changed
in
the
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
¦
Ì
ÿ
¯
²
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
^
~
Ä
Å
«
/
_
»
¤
´
- 184 -
(5) PC-851
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
±
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
û
ù
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
Ï
¸
°
¨
(
)
Ö
Ü
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
/
_
(6) PC-855
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
~
«
»
/
_
¤
- 185 -
(7) PC-1250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
¤
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
”
Á
Â
á
â
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
Ó
Ô
ó
ô
´
µ
¶
·
Ä
ä
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
¦
§
¨
Ö
×
ö
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ç
É
Ë
ç
é
ë
(
¸
)
©
*
J
j
Ú
ú
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
Ü
Ý
ü
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
Î
í
î
^
~
®
/
_
ß
(8) PC-1251
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
)
©
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
®
/
_
- 186 -
(9) PC-1252
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
Ï
ï
(10) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ƒ
£
¤
¥
¦
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
)
©
ª
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
~
®
/
_
- 187 -
(11) PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
!
”
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
¹
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
)
©
ª
¹
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
/
_
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
³
Ó
ó
´
Ä
Å
ä
å
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
Õ
Ö
×
õ
ö
÷
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
©
ø
¹
)
É
é
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
¼
½
¾
æ
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
¨
¸
¯
^
~
®
/
_
Æ
- 188 -
(13) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
¡
¢
£
C
¥
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
º
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
A
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
¿
Ï
ï
(14) Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
- 189 -
11.2 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
¥
/
_
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
¥
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 190 -
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 191 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
^
˜
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(6) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 192 -
(7) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
C
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 193 -
11.3 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B)
(1) PC-850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
-
!
”
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ö
õ
µ
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
§
÷
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ÿ
¿
°
•
)
Ö
Ü
ø
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
¢
¥
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
/
_
ƒ
»
¤
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
α
β
Γ
π
Σ
σ
µ
τ
≡
±
≥
≤
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
÷
≈
°
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
Ω
)
Ö
Ü
•
•
J
j
¬
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
∞
∅
ε
√
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt
∫
«
/
»
∩
- 194 -
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
C
C
!
”
ó
ú
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
•
)
ë
Ö
Ü
*
J
j
¬
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
º
ª
-
!
"
ß
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
õ
µ
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
§
÷
û
ã
g
h
i
ù
(
ê
ë
è
¿
¬
°
•
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
ø
£
½
¼
¡
<
=
>
?
ì
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
ÿ
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
«
/
»
¤
- 195 -
(5) PC-851
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
C
C
!
"
±
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ô
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
§
°
û
ù
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
(
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
Ï
î
½
<
=
>
?
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
Ä
8
«
»
/
(6) PC-855
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
_
~
«
»
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
/
¤
- 196 -
(7) PC-1250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Ä
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
á
â
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
ô
¤
§
ä
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Ö
ö
÷
g
h
i
Ç
É
ç
(
)
é
J
j
ú
ü
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
Î
/
(8) PC-1251
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
§
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 197 -
(9) PC-1252
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
ï
ÿ
(10) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
£
¤
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
§
(
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
_
~
/
- 198 -
(11) PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
Ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
Ä
Å
ä
å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
õ
ö
÷
Ö
g
h
i
§
·
(
Ø
ø
)
É
é
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
Æ
æ
- 199 -
(13) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
B
Ï
ÿ
(14) Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting on Z2;1
command.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 200 -
11.4 TrueType FONT
(1) PC-850
(2) PC-8
- 201 -
(3) PC-852
(4) PC-857
- 202 -
(5) PC-851
(6) PC-855
- 203 -
(7) PC-1250
(8) PC-1251
- 204 -
(9) PC-1252
(10) PC-1253
- 205 -
(11) PC-1254
(12) PC-1257
- 206 -
(13) LATIN9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 @ P
`
1 A Q a
2 B R b
p
q
r
° À Ð à
± Á Ñ á
² Â Ò â
³ Ã Ó ã
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
¡
"
¢
£
# 3 C S c
$ 4 D T d
% 5 E U e
& 6 F V f
s
t
C ZŠ Ä Ô ä
u
v
¥ µ Å Õ å
ŠS ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
'
(
7 G W g w
§
s
· Ç × ç ÷
8 H X h
x
y
z
{
|
z È Ø è
Š Š
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
)
9
:
I Y i
© ¹ É Ù é
*
+
,
J Z
j
k
l
ª
º
Ê Ú ê
; K [
< L
« » Ë Û ë
¬ Œ Ì Ü ì
- œ Í Ý í
\
– = M ] m }
.
> N ^ n ~
? O _ o
®
¯
Î
Ï
Þ
ß
î
ï
Ÿ
/
¿
(14) Arabic
- 207 -
12. BAR CODE TABLE
(1) WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC)
(2) CODE39 (Standard)
ITF, MSI, UCC/EAN128, Industrial 2 of 5
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
$
%
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
*
+
K
L
–
•
M
N
O
/
(3) CODE39 (Full ASCII)
[Transfer code]
[Drawing code]
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
0
1
%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P
+A +Q
"
2
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W
(
8
+H
+I
+X
+Y
+Z
)
9
*
J
j
/J
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
J
+J
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
/K
/L
–
K
L
%K +K %P
%L +L %Q
<
=
>
?
\
|
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
%M +M %R
%N +N %S
%O +O %T
^
~
.
/
_
/O
- 208 -
(4) NW-7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
A
B
C
D
a
b
c
d
e
$
t
*
+
–
•
n
6
/
(5) CODE93
[Transfer code]
[Drawing code]
2
3
4
5
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
0
1
%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P
+A +Q
"
2
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W
(
8
+H
+I
+X
+Y
+Z
)
9
J
j
/J
+
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
J
+J
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
K
L
%K +K %P
%L +L %Q
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
/L
–
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
%M +M %R
%N +N %S
%O +O %T
^
~
.
/
_
/
- 209 -
(6) CODE128
[Transfer code]
–
–
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
[Drawing code]
G
H
I
g
h
i
Value Code Table
(
HT
EM
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
J
j
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
FF
CR
SO
SI
FS
GS
RS
US
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
How to transmit control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A (3EH, 41H)
>B (3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>] (3EH, 5DH)
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)
>_ (3EH, 5FH)
How to transmit special codes:
Value
30 (Character >)
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
>0
>1
>2
>3
>4
>5
>6
>7
>8
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
Designation of start code:
START (CODE A)
START (CODE B)
START (CODE C)
→
→
→
>7
>6
>5
- 210 -
Value Code Table
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
0
SP
!
SP
!
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
D
E
D
E
F
G
H
I
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
BS
HT
h
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
CODE B
1
i
j
2
"
"
F
LF
3
#
$
%
&
'
#
$
%
&
'
G
VT
k
4
H
FF
l
5
I
CR
m
n
o
p
q
r
6
J
J
SO
7
K
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
SI
8
(
(
L
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
9
)
)
M
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
*
*
N
+
,
+
,
O
s
P
t
–
.
–
.
Q
u
v
R
/
/
S
w
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
T
U
y
V
SUB
ESC
FS
z
W
X
{
¦
Y
GS
}
Z
RS
~
DEL
[
US
\
\
FNC3 FNC3
FNC2 FNC2
SHIFT SHIFT
CODE C CODE C
]
]
^
^
;
;
_
_
`
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
FNC4
CODE B
a
b
c
FNC4
CODE A CODE A
FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
d
e
f
103
104
105
START CODE A
START CODE B
START CODE C
g
- 211 -
(7) Data Matrix
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.
Format ID
Code
Details
1
2
3
4
5
6
Numerics
Letters
0 to 9 space
A to Z space
Alphanumerics, symbols
Alphanumerics
ASCII (7-bit)
0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
0 to 9 A to Z space
00H to 7FH
ISO (8-bit)
00H to FFH (Kanji)
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
How to send control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
>^
>_
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
How to send a special code
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 212 -
(8) PDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.
Mode Code Details
EXC mode
Alphanumerics, symbol 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ”
# $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - .
/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^
_ ` { | } ~
CR HT
Binary/ASCII Plus
mode
Binary International
Character Set
Numerics
00H to FFH (Kanji)
Numeric
0 to 9
Compaction mode
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
How to send control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
How to send a special code
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 213 -
(9) MicroPDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.
Mode
Details
Upper case letters, A to Z, space
space
Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
Character Set
Numerics
0 to 9
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
How to send control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
How to send a special code
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 214 -
(10) QR code
When manual mode is selected in the Format Command
Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode
Mode selection
Binary mode
Mode selection
Mixed mode
Data
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
(4 digits)
Data to be printed
“,” (comma)
“,” (comma)
Data
Data
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However, since
the data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used should be designated
by selecting the mode.
Mode
Code
Details
N
A
Numerals
0 to 9
Alphanumerics, symbols
A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B
K
Binary (8-bit)
Kanji
00H to FFH
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.
When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:
Data to be printed
[Transfer code for QR code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
q
r
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
•
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.
- 215 -
How to send control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A (3EH, 41H)
>B (3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>] (3EH, 5DH)
>^ (3EH, 5EH)
>_ (3EH, 5FH)
How to send a special code
(3EH) >0 (3EH, 30H)
>
→
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
Examples of data designation for QR code
Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
A A B C 1 2 3
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
Mixed mode
Numeric mode
Kanji mode
: 123456
: Kanji data
Binary mode
: a
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric and symbol mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a
i
u
e
o
, A A B C
Data to be
printed
Data to be
printed
No. of data Data to be printed
strings
Data to be
printed
Designation of mode
Automatic mode
When the same data as above is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C
Data to be printed
i
u
e
o
- 216 -
(11) Postal code
Customer bar code
POSTNET
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
K
L
–
M
N
O
RM4SCC
2
KIX CODE
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
p
q
r
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
a
b
c
d
e
f
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
8
9
(
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
J
J
j
K
L
K
L
k
l
M
N
O
M
N
O
m
n
o
* “(” or “)” can be designated only as a start/stop code.
These should not be entered in data.
If these are entered between data, no bar code is drawn.
- 217 -
(12) MaxiCode
Symbol Character
Value
Code Set A
Code Set B
Code Set C
Code Set D
Code Set E
Decimal
Binary
Character
Decimal
Character
Decimal
Character
Decimal
Character
Decimal
Character
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
011010
011011
011100
011101
011110
011111
100000
100001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
110000
110001
110010
110011
110100
110101
110110
110111
111000
111001
111010
111011
111100
111101
111110
111111
CR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
13
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
96
97
98
99
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
J
K
L
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Í
Î
Ï
í
î
ï
CR
SO
SI
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Ø
Ù
Ú
SUB
[EC]
[EC]
[EC]
[NS]
[EC]
[NS]
[EC]
[Pad]
[Pad]
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
ESC
27
[NS]
[NS]
[NS]
Space
32
(
123
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
ª
¬
±
²
219
220
221
222
223
170
172
177
178
179
181
185
186
188
189
190
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
¡
251
252
253
254
255
161
168
171
175
176
180
183
184
187
191
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
FS
GS
RS
US
{C159}
NBSP
¢
£
¤
¥
28
29
30
31
[Pad]
[Pad]
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
”
+
,
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
)
~
DEL
;
<
=
>
?
[
\
]
^
_
125
126
127
59
60
61
62
63
91
92
93
94
95
32
44
46
47
58
64
33
124
159
160
162
163
164
165
166
167
169
173
174
182
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
¨
«
¯
°
'
•
³
¹
º
¼
½
¾
{C128}
{C129}
{C130}
{C131}
{C132}
{C133}
{C134}
{C135}
{C136}
{C137}
§
©
SHY
®
-
.
/
»
¿
Space
{C138}
{C139}
{C140}
{C141}
{C142}
{C143}
{C144}
{C145}
{C146}
{C147}
{C148}
¶
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
,
.
/
:
@
!
{C149}
{C150}
{C151}
{C152}
{C153}
{C154}
{C155}
{C156}
{C157}
{C158}
|
[Pad]
[2 Shift A]
[3 Shift A]
[Pad]
[Latch A]
Space
[Latch A]
Space
[Latch A]
Space
[Shift B]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Shift E]
[Shift A]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Shift E]
[Latch A]
32
32
32
[Lock In C]
[Shift C]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Lock In E]
[Latch B]
[Shift D]
[Shift E]
[Latch B]
[Lock In D]
[Shift E]
[Latch B]
[Latch B]
- 218 -
How to send control code data
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
How to send a special code
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used, however, it can be designated.
If it is designated, data following “NUL” code is not printed.
- 219 -
(13) CP code
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
How to send control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
How to send a special code
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 220 -
13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA
:
Field to be incremented/decremented
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)
:
Field subject to printing numerals under bars.
Type of Bar Code: JAN8, EAN8
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
8 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
8 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
- 221 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13, EAN13
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
- 222 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 10 digits
- 223 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the bar code.
6 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
C/D
Drawing
Data
0
Other than 6 digits
Not to be drawn
- 224 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10
10 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10
Input
Data
10 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
9 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
- 225 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
- 226 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
15 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15
Other than 15 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
15 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15
Other than 15 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
Input
Data
14 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
D13 D14
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
P/CD D7
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
- 227 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Other than 18 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Other than 18 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Input
Data
17 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Drawing
Data
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
- 228 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
14 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
14 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 12 digits
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 12 digits
- 229 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
17 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
17 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 15 digits
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 15 digits
- 230 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9
Input
Data
9 digits
Drawing
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7
Data
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9
Input
Data
9 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in
the bar code.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
8 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
C/D
D7 D8
Drawing
Data
0
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
- 231 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7
Data
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
Calculate and reflect modulus
10 C/D in the bar code.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
C/D
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Drawing
Data
0
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
- 232 -
Type of Bar Code: MSI
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 15 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
16 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) IBM modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Input
Min. 2 digits
Max. 15 digits
(including C/D)
Data
To be checked IBM as modulus 10
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
1 digit
16 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 14 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
15 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(4) IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 10.
14 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(5) IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 11.
14 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 233 -
Type of Bar Code: Interleaved 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 126 digits
Drawing
Data
0
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Min. 2 digits
Max. 126 digits
(including C/D)
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Drawing
Data
0
1 digit
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of DBP modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a DBP modulus 10.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 234 -
Type of Bar Code: Industrial 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 126 digits
Drawing
Data
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus check character check
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits
Max. 126 digits
(including C/D)
To be checked as a modulus check character
Drawing
Data
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
1 digit
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus check character
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus check character.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 235 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Standard)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 123 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
124 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
Min. 2 digits
Max. 123 digits
(including C/D)
Drawing
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
1 digit
124 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Stop code
C/D Sp
Max. 122 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.
123 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 236 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
Min. 2 digits
Max. 60 digits
(including C/D)
Drawing
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
1 digit
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Stop code
C/D Sp
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.
Type of Bar Code: NW7
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
Max. 125 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
Drawing
Data
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 237 -
Type of Bar Code: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)
(1) No affix
PSEUDO103 check
Auto affix of PSEUDO103
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Min. 3 digits
Max. 125 digits
(including start
code)
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 C/D Sp
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.
Drawing
Data
2 digits or less
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C
Type of Bar Code: Auto selection of CODE128
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Start code
Selection code
Affix
PSEUDO103
C/D.
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C
- 238 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE93
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.
Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.
Start code
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.
Type of Bar Code: UCC/EAN128
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data
St FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
19 digits
Drawing
Data
Start code
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.
Stop code
Other than 19 digits
Not to be drawn
- 239 -
Type of Bar Code: POSTNET
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
5 digits
Drawing
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp
Start code
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
9 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Start code
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp Fr D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Fr
Drawing
Data
Start code
Frame
Frame
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Other than 5, 9, and
Not to be drawn
11 digits
Type of Bar Code: RM4SCC
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
(St)
(Sp)
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Start code
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D Sp
Input
Data
Stop code
12 digits
Drawing
Data
Start code
Not to be drawn
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
13 digits or more
Type of Bar Code: KIX CODE
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
19 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 240 -
Type of Bar Code: Customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
20 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Start code
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.
21 digits or more
Type of Bar Code: Highest priority customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
19 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Start code
CC7
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.
20 digits or more
- 241 -
14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE
Designation of Start/Stop Code
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
12345ABC
Drawing Data
Standard
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
*12345ABC
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
12345ABC
Omit
(No designation)
*12345ABC
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
12345ABC
**12345ABC
*/J12345ABC
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345*ABC
*12345/JABC
***12345ABC
*/J/J12345ABC
**12345ABC**
*/J12345ABC/J*
**12345*ABC*
*/J12345/JABC*
12345ABC*
CODE 39
Add start code
12345ABC*
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345ABC**
12345ABC/J*
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
12345*ABC*
12345/JABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345ABC***
*12345ABC/J/J*
*12345*ABC**
*12345/JABC/J*
Add stop code
- 242 -
Designation of Start/Stop Code
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
12345ABC
Drawing Data
Standard
12345ABC
12345ABC
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
*12345ABC
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
12345/JABC
**12345ABC
*/J12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
CODE 39
Start/stop code
not added
Designation of Start/Stop Code
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
Drawing Data
12345678
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
a12345678a
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
a12345a678a
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
a12345678
Omit
(No designation)
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
aa12345678
a12345678c
ab12345678d
a12345a678
aab12345678
aa12345678bc
ad12345b678c
12345678a
Add start code
NW7
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
a12345678a
12345678ca
b12345678da
12345a678a
ab12345678a
a12345678bca
d12345b678ca
12345678
Add stop code
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
a12345678
12345678c
Start/stop code
not added
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
- 243 -
|